Operating Instructions

Installation Instructions

Main motor

SIMOTICS M-1PH8
Type 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Edition 01/2019 www.siemens.com/drives

31.01.2019 10:33
V22.00
 Introduction 1

Safety information 2

Description 3
Main motor
Preparations for use 4
SIMOTICS M-1PH8
Type 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. 5
Mounting

Electrical connection 6
Operating Instructions
Installation Instructions
Commissioning 7

Operation 8

Maintenance 9

Spare parts 10

Disposal 11

Service and Support A

Technical specifications B

Quality documents C

Additional documents D

Edition 01/2019
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG Document order number: A5E35768675A AD Copyright © Siemens AG 2019.

Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 01/2019 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................13
2 Safety information.......................................................................................................................................15
2.1 Information for the nominated person in control of the electrical installation .........................15
2.2 The 5 safety rules...................................................................................................................15
2.3 Qualified personnel ................................................................................................................16
2.4 Safe handling .........................................................................................................................16
2.5 Electrostatic sensitive devices ...............................................................................................18
2.6 Interference immunity.............................................................................................................19
2.7 Interference voltages when operating the converter ..............................................................19
2.8 Electromagnetic fields when operating electrical power engineering installations.................19
3 Description..................................................................................................................................................21
4 Preparations for use ...................................................................................................................................29
4.1 Safety-related aspects to consider when configuring the plant..............................................29
4.2 Observing the operating mode...............................................................................................29
4.3 Cooling water quality for water-cooled motors .......................................................................29
4.4 Ensuring cooling.....................................................................................................................30
4.5 Interlock circuit for the external fan ........................................................................................33
4.6 Interlock circuit for anti-condensation heating (option)...........................................................33
4.7 Thermal motor protection .......................................................................................................34
4.8 Overheating during periodic duty ...........................................................................................34
4.9 Noise emissions .....................................................................................................................35
4.10 Rotational speed limit values .................................................................................................35
4.11 System-inherent frequencies .................................................................................................35
4.12 Torsional loading of the drive train due to faults in the electrical supply ................................35
4.13 Transport and storage............................................................................................................36
4.13.1 Checking the delivery.............................................................................................................36
4.13.2 Lifting and transportation........................................................................................................36
4.13.3 Transporting a force-ventilated motor that has already been in operation.............................40
4.13.4 Transporting a water-cooled motor that has already been in operation.................................40
4.13.5 Transporting the machine set.................................................................................................41
4.13.6 Storage...................................................................................................................................41
4.13.7 Attaching the rotor shipping brace prior to storage ................................................................43
4.13.8 Protect the cooling water system of water-cooled motors......................................................44
4.13.9 Protection against corrosion...................................................................................................45

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 5
Table of contents

4.14 Converter operation ...............................................................................................................45

4.14.1 Connecting to a converter ......................................................................................................45
4.14.2 Converter input voltage ..........................................................................................................46
4.14.3 Insulated bearings for converter operation.............................................................................46
5 Mounting.....................................................................................................................................................49
5.1 Safety instructions for mounting.............................................................................................49
5.2 Preparing for installation ........................................................................................................50
5.2.1 Requirements for installation..................................................................................................50
5.2.2 Insulation resistance and polarization index ..........................................................................50
5.2.3 Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index........................................................51
5.2.4 Prepare the mounting surfaces (IM B3) .................................................................................54
5.2.5 Prepare the mounting surfaces (flange mounting) .................................................................54
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it ...................................................54
5.3.1 Preconditions for correct alignment and secure attachment .................................................54
5.3.2 Checking the load handling attachments ...............................................................................54
5.3.3 Removing anti-corrosion protection .......................................................................................55
5.3.4 Mounting the output elements................................................................................................55
5.3.5 Lifting and transporting the machine ......................................................................................57
5.3.6 Open the condensation water drain holes (water-cooled motor) ...........................................58
5.3.7 Open condensation drain holes (air-cooled motor, L12) ........................................................59
5.3.8 Putting the machine down......................................................................................................60
5.3.9 Roughly aligning the machine ................................................................................................60
5.4 Installing the machine ............................................................................................................61
5.4.1 Selecting fixing screws...........................................................................................................61
5.4.2 Preconditions for smooth, vibration-free operation ................................................................61
5.4.3 Vibration severity....................................................................................................................61
5.4.4 Aligning to the driven machine ...............................................................................................63
5.4.5 Mounting the motor ................................................................................................................65
5.5 Connecting the cooling water supply .....................................................................................65
5.6 Refitting the external fan ........................................................................................................66
6 Electrical connection...................................................................................................................................67
6.1 Safety instructions for the electrical connection .....................................................................67
6.2 Preparation.............................................................................................................................68
6.2.1 Selecting cables .....................................................................................................................68
6.2.2 Connect up the ground conductor..........................................................................................68
6.3 Connecting .............................................................................................................................69
6.3.1 Circuit diagram .......................................................................................................................69
6.3.2 Terminal designation..............................................................................................................69
6.3.3 Laying cables .........................................................................................................................70
6.3.4 Electrical connection data ......................................................................................................70
6.3.5 Connection with cable lugs ....................................................................................................71
6.3.6 Connecting aluminum conductors..........................................................................................73
6.3.7 Stepless mating face for the seal in the terminal box cover...................................................73
6.3.8 Performing connection operations .........................................................................................74
6.3.9 Internal equipotential bonding ................................................................................................74
6.4 Auxiliary circuits .....................................................................................................................75

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

6 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Table of contents

6.4.1 Selecting cables .....................................................................................................................75

6.4.2 Connecting an external fan ....................................................................................................75
6.4.2.1 Connecting an EC external fan ..............................................................................................77
6.4.2.2 Connecting an external fan with three-phase motor (option L75) ..........................................78
6.4.2.3 Supply values for external fans with three-phase motor (option L75) ....................................79
6.4.2.4 Attached air discharge throttle plate (option L75) ..................................................................80
6.4.3 Connecting the speed encoder ..............................................................................................82
6.4.4 Connect the holding brake .....................................................................................................83
6.4.5 Connecting the temperature sensor.......................................................................................83
6.4.6 Connecting to a converter ......................................................................................................84
6.4.7 Converter operation on a grounded network..........................................................................85
7 Commissioning ...........................................................................................................................................87
7.1 Insulation resistance and polarization index ..........................................................................88
7.2 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning ..................................................................89
7.3 Perform a test run with the water-cooled motor .....................................................................91
7.4 Switching on...........................................................................................................................91
7.5 Test run ..................................................................................................................................92
7.6 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperature (optional) ................................................93
8 Operation....................................................................................................................................................95
8.1 Safety instructions for operation.............................................................................................95
8.2 Do not operate water-cooled motors without cooling water ...................................................97
8.3 Switching on the machine ......................................................................................................98
8.4 Switching off water-cooled motors .........................................................................................98
8.5 Switching off force-ventilated motors .....................................................................................98
8.6 Switching on again after an emergency switching-off ............................................................99
8.7 Stoppages ..............................................................................................................................99
8.7.1 Avoidance of damage to roller bearings during stoppages ....................................................99
8.8 Decommissioning the machine ............................................................................................100
8.9 Re-commissioning the machine ...........................................................................................100
8.10 Faults ...................................................................................................................................100
8.10.1 Inspections in the event of faults..........................................................................................100
8.10.2 Electrical faults at force-ventilated motors ...........................................................................101
8.10.3 Electrical faults at water-cooled motors ...............................................................................101
8.10.4 Mechanical faults .................................................................................................................102
8.10.5 Roller bearing faults .............................................................................................................103
8.10.6 Holding brake faults .............................................................................................................103
9 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................105
9.1 Observe the operating instructions of the components........................................................105
9.2 Inspection and maintenance ................................................................................................106
9.2.1 Safety instructions for inspection and maintenance.............................................................106
9.2.2 Inspections in the event of faults..........................................................................................107
9.2.3 Initial inspection....................................................................................................................107

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 7
Table of contents

9.2.4 Main inspection ....................................................................................................................108

9.2.5 Regreasing intervals ............................................................................................................108
9.2.6 Changing bearings when using permanently lubricated rolling-contact bearings ................109
9.2.7 Maintenance.........................................................................................................................109
9.2.7.1 Measuring the insulation resistance during the course of maintenance work......................109
9.2.7.2 Maintenance intervals ..........................................................................................................109
9.2.7.3 Rolling-contact bearings.......................................................................................................110
9.2.7.4 Lubrication............................................................................................................................110
9.2.7.5 Cleaning the spent grease chamber ....................................................................................116
9.2.7.6 Maintaining the cooling water system ..................................................................................116
9.2.7.7 Servicing the external fan.....................................................................................................116
9.2.7.8 Maintaining terminal boxes ..................................................................................................118
9.3 Repair...................................................................................................................................119
9.3.1 Prepare servicing work.........................................................................................................119
9.3.2 Screws with preCOTE coating .............................................................................................120
9.3.3 Disassembling a water-cooled motor ...................................................................................120
9.3.4 Dissembling a force-ventilated motor...................................................................................121
9.3.5 Removing and installing the protecting ring .........................................................................122
9.3.6 Removing and mounting the bearing shields .......................................................................123
9.3.7 Installing and sealing the motor ...........................................................................................123
9.3.8 Sealing the motor (type 1PH828.)........................................................................................125
9.3.9 Relocating the external fan (type 1PH828.) .........................................................................126
9.3.10 Removing and mounting the external fan ............................................................................126
9.3.11 Removing and mounting the speed sensor..........................................................................128
9.3.12 Connecting the speed encoder ............................................................................................130
9.3.13 Replacing the DRIVE-CLiQ interface (encoder module)......................................................130
9.3.14 Touch up any damaged paintwork .......................................................................................131
10 Spare parts ...............................................................................................................................................133
10.1 Ordering data .......................................................................................................................133
10.2 Spare parts kits ....................................................................................................................133
10.3 Holding brake .......................................................................................................................134
10.4 Ordering spare parts via the Internet ...................................................................................134
10.5 Anti-condensation heating....................................................................................................135
10.6 Water-cooled motor..............................................................................................................135
10.6.1 Water-cooled motor, complete .............................................................................................135
10.6.2 Roller bearing cartridge DE with radial shaft sealing ring with regreasing ...........................136
10.6.3 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, belt coupling..........................................................137
10.6.4 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, coupling output, with regreasing ...........................138
10.6.5 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, coupling output, with permanent lubrication .........139
10.6.6 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, with permanent lubrication.............................140
10.6.7 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)............................141
10.6.8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)............................................142
10.6.9 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end "Performance" ................................................143
10.7 Force-ventilated motor .........................................................................................................144
10.7.1 Force-ventilated motor, complete.........................................................................................144
10.7.2 External fan ..........................................................................................................................145
10.7.3 External fan (option L75)......................................................................................................145
10.7.4 Roller bearing cartridge DE with radial shaft sealing ring with regreasing ...........................146

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

8 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Table of contents

10.7.5 Roller bearing cartridge DE, belt coupling............................................................................147

10.7.6 Roller bearing cartridge DE, coupling output, with regreasing .............................................148
10.7.7 Roller bearing cartridge DE, coupling output, with permanent lubrication ...........................149
10.7.8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with permanent lubrication ...................................................150
10.7.9 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)............................151
10.7.10 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)............................................152
10.7.11 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, "Performance" ......................................................................153
10.8 Terminal box ........................................................................................................................154
10.9 Speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)............................................................................155
10.10 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.)............................................................................................156
11 Disposal....................................................................................................................................................157
11.1 RoHS - restricting the use of certain hazardous substances ...............................................157
11.2 Information according to Article 33 of the REACH regulation ..............................................157
11.3 Preparing for disassembly....................................................................................................158
11.4 Dismantling the machine......................................................................................................158
11.5 Disposal of components.......................................................................................................158
A Service and Support .................................................................................................................................161
B Technical specifications............................................................................................................................163
B.1 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections..............................................................163
C Quality documents....................................................................................................................................165
D Additional documents ...............................................................................................................................167
D.1 Reader notes on the operating instructions of the holding brake.........................................167
D.2 Operating instructions, holding brake...................................................................................169
D.3 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH180 .....................193
D.4 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH225 .....................207
D.5 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180 ...................221
D.6 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225 ...................235
D.7 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180.......................249
D.8 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK225.......................263
D.9 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180 ....................279
D.10 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225 ....................293
D.11 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SH280.......................309
Index.........................................................................................................................................................323

Tables

Table 3-1 Elements on the rating plate........................................................................................................22

Table 3-2 Machine design ........................................................................................................................23

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 9
Table of contents

Table 3-3 Technical data of the holding brake ............................................................................................26

Table 3-4 Roller bearing versions .............................................................................................................27
Table 4-1 Cooling water specification .......................................................................................................29
Table 4-2 Pressure drop in motors with pipe connection .........................................................................33
Table 4-3 Tightening torque and preloading force for axially fixing the rotor ..............................................39
Table 5-1 Stator winding insulation resistance at 40° C ..............................................................................52
Table 5-2 Maximum permitted radial vibration severity ...............................................................................62
Table 5-3 Maximum permitted axial vibration severity ................................................................................62
Table 5-4 Permissible deviations when aligning the motor .........................................................................64
Table 5-5 Rate of flow and pressure drop ...................................................................................................66
Table 6-1 Terminal designations using the 1U1-1 as an example ..............................................................69
Table 6-2 Data for electrical connection ......................................................................................................71
Table 7-1 Minimum radial forces .................................................................................................................90
Table 7-2 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperatures before commissioning ...............................93
Table 7-3 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperatures ...................................................................93
Table 8-1 Electrical faults .......................................................................................................................101
Table 8-2 Electrical faults .......................................................................................................................102
Table 8-3 Mechanical faults.......................................................................................................................102
Table 8-4 Roller bearing faults .............................................................................................................103
Table 9-1 Checks after installation or repair .............................................................................................107
Table 9-2 Checks that must be performed during the main inspection .....................................................108
Table 9-3 Maintenance measures .............................................................................................................109
Table 9-4 Criteria for selecting roller bearing greases...............................................................................111
Table 9-5 Roller bearing greases for vertical and horizontal types of construction ..................................112
Table 9-6 Alternative greases with NLGI Class 2 for motors with a horizontal type of construction .........112
Table 9-7 Grease for the "Performance" version.......................................................................................112
Table 10-1 Motor, complete ........................................................................................................................135
Table 10-2 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with
regreasing ................................................................................................................................136
Table 10-3 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing ......137
Table 10-4 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing ....138
Table 10-5 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent
lubrication .................................................................................................................................139
Table 10-6 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, permanent lubrication .................140
Table 10-7 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) ..............141
Table 10-8 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.) ...............................142
Table 10-9 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing .............................143
Table 10-10 Motor, complete .......................................................................................................................144
Table 10-11 Spare parts for external fan.......................................................................................................145

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

10 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Table of contents

Table 10-12 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with
regreasing ................................................................................................................................146
Table 10-13 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing ......147
Table 10-14 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing ....148
Table 10-15 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent
lubrication .................................................................................................................................149
Table 10-16 Spare parts for roller bearing cartridge, non-drive end, permanent lubrication ........................150
Table 10-17 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) ..............151
Table 10-18 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.) ..............................152
Table 10-19 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing .............................153
Table 10-20 Spare parts for terminal box .....................................................................................................154
Table 10-21 Spare part, speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) ..............................................................155
Table 10-22 Spare part, speed encoder (type 1PH828.) ............................................................................156
Table B-1 Tightening torques for bolted connections with a tolerance of ±10%........................................163
Table D-1 Technical data of the holding brake ..........................................................................................167

Figures

Figure 3-1 Schematic layout of rating plate ..................................................................................................21

Figure 4-1 Air guidance from the DE to the NDE (schematic representation, types 1PH818. and
1PH822.) .....................................................................................................................................31
Figure 4-2 Bypass for 1PH822. for IP23 ......................................................................................................32
Figure 4-3 Air guidance from the NDE to the DE (schematic representation, type 1PH828.) for IP55 ........32
Figure 4-4 Lifting the machine (schematic representation)...........................................................................38
Figure 4-5 Rotor shipping brace ...................................................................................................................39
Figure 4-6 Schematic representation of a single drive .................................................................................47
Figure 5-1 Balancing type on the drive-end side ..........................................................................................55
Figure 5-2 Water drain holes ........................................................................................................................59
Figure 5-3 Water drain holes, for types 1PH818., 1PH822. .........................................................................59
Figure 5-4 Max. permissible vibration velocity, taking into account the vibration displacement and
vibration acceleration ..................................................................................................................62
Figure 5-5 Aligning the motor .......................................................................................................................64
Figure 6-1 Terminal lug ① for the grounding conductor for a force-ventilated motor ..................................68
Figure 6-2 Terminal lug ① for the grounding conductor for a water-cooled motor ......................................69
Figure 6-3 External fan terminal box ① (schematic representation)............................................................77
Figure 6-4 External fan terminal box ① (schematic representation)............................................................78
Figure 6-5 Throttle plate for suction-type ventilation (DE to NDE)................................................................81
Figure 6-6 Throttle plate for forced-draft ventilation (NDE to DE).................................................................81
Figure 6-7 Detailed view: Plug-in connection ..............................................................................................82
Figure 6-8 Sensor Module ① mounted on the terminal box ........................................................................83
Figure 9-1 Flat grease nipples ① and ②, schematic representation for types 1PH818. and 1PH822. ....115

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 11
Table of contents

Figure 9-2 Flat grease nipple ① and ② (schematic representation for type 1PH828.) ............................115
Figure 9-3 Fitting the protecting ring...........................................................................................................123
Figure 9-4 Sealing gap between the enclosure and bearing shields (schematic representation) ..............125
Figure 9-5 Installing the rotary shaft seal....................................................................................................126
Figure 9-6 Unscrewing the external fan (1PH818., 1PH822.) ....................................................................127
Figure 9-7 Unscrewing the external fan (1PH828.) ....................................................................................127
Figure 9-8 Detailed view of the speed encoder ..........................................................................................128
Figure 9-9 Electrical connection of the speed sensor ................................................................................130
Figure 10-1 Schematic diagram of motor (complete) ...................................................................................135
Figure 10-2 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing .......................136
Figure 10-3 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing ..............................137
Figure 10-4 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing.........................138
Figure 10-5 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication .......139
Figure 10-6 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, permanent lubrication ........................................140
Figure 10-7 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.).................................141
Figure 10-8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.).................................................142
Figure 10-9 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing ...................................................143
Figure 10-10 Schematic representation of the motor, complete.....................................................................144
Figure 10-11 Spare parts for external fan (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) ............................................................145
Figure 10-12 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing .......................146
Figure 10-13 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing ..............................147
Figure 10-14 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing.........................148
Figure 10-15 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication .......149
Figure 10-16 Roller bearing cartridge, non-drive end, permanent lubrication ...............................................150
Figure 10-17 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.).................................151
Figure 10-18 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.).................................................152
Figure 10-19 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing ...................................................153
Figure 10-20 Terminal box..............................................................................................................................154
Figure 10-21 Speed encoder ..........................................................................................................................155
Figure 10-22 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.).................................................................................................156

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

12 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Introduction 1
In the following text, the motor is referred to as "electrical machine" – or abbreviated, just
"machine".
These operating instructions are valid for 1PH8 induction motors in shaft heights 180 ... 280 in
a force-ventilated or water-cooled version.
● 1PH818.1 and 1PH818.3
● 1PH822.1 and 1PH822.3
● 1PH828.1
The serial number of the motor can be found on the rating plate.
These instructions describe the machine and explain how to handle it, from initial delivery to
final disposal of the equipment. Keep these instructions for later use.
Read these operating instructions before you handle the machine and follow the instructions to
become familiar with its design and operating principles and thus ensure safe, problem-free
machine operation and long service life.
Safety instructions and handling-related warning notes are provided in these instructions.
When carrying out any activity at or with the machine, carefully comply with all of these notes
for your own safety, to protect other people and to avoid material damage.
Please contact the Service Center (Page 161) if you have any suggestions on how to improve
this document.

Text format features

You can find the following text format features in these instructions:
1. Handling instructions are always formatted as a numbered list. Always perform the steps in
the order given.
● Lists are formatted as bulleted lists.
– Lists on the second level are hyphenated.

Note
The note provides you with additional information about the product itself, handling the product
- and the relevant documentation.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 13
Introduction

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

14 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Safety information 2
2.1 Information for the nominated person in control of the electrical
installation
This electric machine has been designed and built in accordance with the specifications
contained in Directive 2014/35/EU ("Low-Voltage Directive") and is intended for use in
industrial plants. Please observe the country-specific regulations when using the electric
machine outside the European Community. Follow the local and industry-specific safety and
setup regulations.
The persons responsible for the plant must ensure the following:
● Planning and configuration work and all work carried out on and with the machine is only to
be done by qualified personnel.
● The operating instructions must always be available for all work.
● The technical data as well as the specifications relating to the permissible installation,
connection, ambient and operating conditions are taken into account at all times.
● The specific setup and safety regulations as well as regulations on the use of personal
protective equipment are observed.
Note
Use the services and support provided by the local service center (Page 161) for planning,
installation, commissioning and service work.

2.2 The 5 safety rules

For your own personal safety and to prevent material damage when carrying out any work,
always observe the safety-relevant instructions and the following five safety rules according to
EN 50110‑1 "Working in a voltage-free state". Apply the five safety rules in the sequence stated
before starting work.

5 safety rules
1. Disconnect the system.
Also disconnect the auxiliary circuits, for example, anti-condensation heating.
2. Secure against reconnection.
3. Verify absence of operating voltage.
4. Ground and short-circuit.
5. Provide protection against adjacent live parts.
To energize the system, apply the measures in reverse order.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 15
Safety information
2.3 Qualified personnel

2.3 Qualified personnel

All work at the machine must be carried out by qualified personnel only. For the purpose of this
documentation, qualified personnel is taken to mean people who fulfill the following
requirements:
● Through appropriate training and experience, they are able to recognize and avoid risks and
potential dangers in their particular field of activity.
● They have been instructed to carry out work on the machine by the appropriate person
responsible.

2.4 Safe handling

Workplace safety depends on the attentiveness, care, and common sense of the personnel
who install, operate, and maintain the machine. In addition to the safety measures cited, as a
matter of principle, the use of caution is necessary when you are near the machine. Always pay
attention to your safety.
Also observe the following to prevent accidents:
● General safety regulations applicable in the country where the machine is deployed.
● Manufacturer-specific and application-specific regulations
● Special agreements made with the operator
● Separate safety instructions supplied with the machine
● Safety symbols and instructions on the machine and its packaging

Danger as a result of stationary parts under voltage (live parts)

Live parts represent a hazard. Touch protection against active (live) parts is no longer
guaranteed if covers are removed. The minimum clearance and creepage distances may be
violated when coming close to live parts. Touching or coming close to them can result in death,
serious injury or material damage.
● Ensure that all live parts are suitably covered.
● Switch off and disconnect the machine first if you want to remove covers. Observe the "5
safety rules".

Risk of injury due to rotating parts

Rotating parts are dangerous. Touch protection against rotating parts is no longer guaranteed
if covers are removed. Touching rotating parts can result in death, serious injury or material
damage.
● Ensure that all rotating parts are reliably covered.
● Switch off and disconnect the machine first if you want to remove covers. Observe the "5
safety rules".
● Only remove covers when the rotating parts have come to a complete standstill.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

16 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Safety information
2.4 Safe handling

Risk of burns due to hot surfaces

Individual machine parts can become hot in operation. Burns can result when coming into
contact with these parts.
● Never touch machine parts during operation.
● Allow the machine to cool before starting work on the machine.
● Check the temperature of parts before touching them. If required, wear suitable protective
equipment.

Health hazard due to chemical substances

Chemical substances required for the setup, operation and maintenance of machines can
present a health risk.
● Observe the product information provided by the manufacturer.

Flammable substances hazard

Chemical substances required for the setup, operation and maintenance of machines may be
flammable. These substances can ignite if handled incorrectly. They can cause burns and
property damage.
● Observe the product information provided by the manufacturer.

See also
The 5 safety rules (Page 15)

Noise emissions
During operation, the machine's noise emission levels can exceed those permitted at the
workplace, which can cause hearing damage.
● Ensure that nobody is in the area of increased noise emissions during machine operation.
● Take steps to reduce noise so that the machine can be operated safely within your system.
The following measures may help to reduce noise.
– Covers
– Noise insulation
– Hearing protection measures

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 17
Safety information
2.5 Electrostatic sensitive devices

2.5 Electrostatic sensitive devices

Material damage due to electrostatic discharge

Electronic modules contain components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
These components can be damaged or destroyed if they are not handled correctly. To protect
equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below.
● Only touch electronic modules if you absolutely have to work on them.
● The body of the person concerned must have been electrostatically discharged and
grounded immediately before any electronic modules are touched.
● Electronic modules should not be brought into contact with electrically insulating materials,
such as:
– Plastic film
– Plastic parts
– Insulating table supports
– Clothing made of synthetic fibers
● Always place electrostatic sensitive devices on conductive bases.
● Always pack, store and transport electronic modules or components in conductive
packaging, such as:
– Metallized plastic or metal containers
– Conductive foam material
– Domestic aluminum foil
The necessary ESD protective measures for electrostatic sensitive devices are illustrated once
again in the following drawings:

6HDWLQJSRVLWLRQ 6WDQGLQJSRVLWLRQ 6WDQGLQJVHDWLQJSRVLWLRQ

G G G
E E
H H
I I I I I

F D F D F D

a = conductive floor surfaceb = ESD table c = ESD shoes

d = ESD overall e = ESD wristband f = cabinet ground connection

See also
Replacing the DRIVE-CLiQ interface (encoder module) (Page 130)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

18 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Safety information
2.6 Interference immunity

2.6 Interference immunity

By selecting suitable signal cables and evaluation units, ensure that the interference immunity
of the machine is not diminished.

2.7 Interference voltages when operating the converter

Interference voltages when operating the converter

When a converter is in operation, the emitted interference varies in strength depending on the
converter (manufacturer, type, interference suppression measures undertaken). On machines
with integrated sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors), interference voltages caused by the converter
may occur on the sensor lead. This can cause faults which can result in eventual or immediate
death, serious injury or material damage.
● Comply with the EMC information provided by the manufacturer of the converter. This is how
you prevent the limit values stipulated by IEC/EN 61000-6-3 for the drive system (consisting
of the machine and converter) from being exceeded.
● You must put appropriate EMC measures in place.

2.8 Electromagnetic fields when operating electrical power engineering

installations
Electrical power equipment generate electromagnetic fields during operation. Potentially lethal
malfunctions can occur in medical implants, e.g. pacemakers, in the vicinity of electrical power
equipment. Data may be lost on magnetic or electronic data carriers.
● Protect the personnel working in the plant by taking appropriate measures, such as erecting
identifying markings, safety barriers and warning signs and giving safety talks.
● Observe the nationally applicable health and safety regulations.
● It is forbidden for people with pacemakers to be close to the machine.
● Do not carry any magnetic or electronic data media.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 19
Safety information
2.8 Electromagnetic fields when operating electrical power engineering installations

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

20 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Description 3
Application range
The motors of the 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. series are used as industrial drives. They have
been designed to address a wide range of drive applications exclusively fed from converters.
They are characterized by their high power density, ruggedness, long lifetime, and overall
reliability.

WARNING
Risk of explosion
This machine is not designed for use in hazardous areas. An explosion can occur if the
machine is operated in these areas. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Never operate this machine in hazardous areas.

Rating plate
The rating plate shows the identification data and the most important technical data. The data
on the rating plate and the contractual agreements define the limits of proper usage.

a0RW  1R1  

,0  ,3  7+&/ +   

8 1 9 , 1 $ 31 N: FRV˳ I 1 +] Q 1 PLQ &2'( 

        
        
         

        

  QPD[ PLQ 

,(&(1
 

   

 

 

6LHPHQV$* 

0DGHLQ*HUPDQ\'1¾UQEHUJ

Figure 3-1 Schematic layout of rating plate

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 21
Description

Table 3-1 Elements on the rating plate

No. Description No. Description

010 MLFB 200 Rated current IN (3)
012 Consecutive number, part of serial number 210 Rated power PN (3)
020 Serial number * 220 cos φ (3)
025 UL approval 230 Rated frequency fN (3)
026 (empty) 240 Rated speed nN (3)
030 Type of construction 250 Operating mode (3)
035 (empty) 255 Code for operating point 3
036 (empty) 260 Rated voltage VN (4)
040 Degree of protection 261 Switching mode 4
045 Type of balancing 270 Rated current IN (4)
050 Rated voltage UN (1) 280 Rated power PN (4)
051 Connection type 1 290 cos φ (4)
060 Rated current IN (1) 300 Rated frequency fN (4)
070 Rated power PN (1) 310 Rated speed nN (4)
080 cos φ (1) 320 Operating mode (4)
090 Rated frequency fN (1) 325 Code for operating point 4
100 Rated speed nN (1) 330 Maximum current IMAX
110 Operating mode (1) 335 Weight
115 Code for operating point 1 340 Maximum torque MMAX
120 Rated voltage UN (2) 350 Maximum speed nMAX
121 Connection type 2 360 Temperature sensor
130 Rated current IN (2) 370 Tachometer/resolver
140 Rated power PN (2) 380 Cooling method
150 cos φ (2) 390 Throughput l/min (m3/s)
160 Rated frequency fN (2) 400 System pressure
170 Rated speed nN (2) 410 Maximum coolant temperature
180 Operating mode (2) 420 Options (I)
185 Code for operating point 2 430 Options (II)
190 Rated voltage UN (3) 440 Optional customer information
191 Connection type 3 450 Anti-condensation heater / place holder

* Based on the serial number, you can identify where the machine was manufactured and where you can
have your questions answered:
No:N... = Nuremberg
No.UC... = Frenstat

Rotor
This machine is an induction motor for low voltage with squirrel-cage induction motor and
integrated cooling circuit.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

22 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Description

Machine design
The regulations and standards used as basis for designing and testing this machine are
stamped on the rating plate. The machine design basically complies with the subsequent
standards: Please refer to the EU Declaration of Conformity for the versions of the harmonized
standards referenced.

Table 3-2 Machine design

Feature Standard
Dimensions and operation characteristics IEC / EN 60034-1
Degree of protection IEC / EN 60034-5
Cooling IEC / EN 60034-6
Type of construction IEC / EN 60034-7
Terminal markings and direction of rotation IEC/EN 60034-8
Noise emission IEC / EN 60034-9
Mechanical vibrations IEC / EN 60034-14
IEC‑standard voltages IEC/DIN IEC 60038
Vibration limit values DIN ISO 10816-3

Relevant directives
The following directives are relevant for the SIMOTICS motor series.

European low-voltage directive

The SIMOTICS motor series complies with the requirements of the low-voltage directive
2014/35/EU.

European machinery directive

The SIMOTICS motor series does not fall within the area of validity of the machinery directive.
However, the use of the products in a typical machine application has been fully assessed for
compliance with the main regulations in this directive concerning health and safety.

European EMC Directive

The SIMOTICS motor series does not fall within the area of validity of the EMC directive. The
products are not considered as devices in the sense of the directive.

Eurasian conformity
The SIMOTICS motor series complies with the requirements of the Russia/Belarus/
Kazakhstan customs union (EAC).

China Compulsory Certification

The SIMOTICS motor series does not fall in the area of validity of the China Compulsory
Certification (CCC).

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 23
Description

Underwriters Laboratories
The SIMOTICS motor series generally complies with UL and cUL requirements as component
of motor applications - and is correspondingly listed. Specifically developed motors and
functions are the exceptions in this case. Here, it is important that you carefully observe the
contents of the quotation and that there is a cUL mark on the rating plate (nameplate)!

Quality management system

Siemens AG employs a quality management system that meets the requirements of ISO 9001
and ISO 14001.

Certificates that can be downloaded

You can download certificates for the SIMOTICS motor series at the following link:
Certificates (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13358/cert)

Drive
The motor speed is controlled using a converter.

NOTICE
Destruction of the machine when operated directly from the line supply
The machine will be destroyed if it is directly connected to the line supply. Only operate the
machine using a converter.

Types of construction
The motor is supplied with two attached lifting eyes. The type construction can be found on the
rating plate.

Vertical type of construction

For IM V5 and IM V15 types of construction with "shaft extension pointing downward", the motor
is equipped with two additional Vario eye bolts. The Vario eyebolts are in the terminal box.

NOTICE
Protection against falling parts
For vertical types of construction, protect the air intake or discharge against falling parts, e.g.
by attaching a canopy. Otherwise the machine could be damaged.

Cooling water-cooled motors

Cooling circuit
The cooling circuit consists of an enclosed, internal air circulation, which is driven by the shaft-
mounted fans and stainless steel tubes that are directly integrated into the laminated stator
core; cooling type IC 71W according to IEC / EN 60034‑6.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

24 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Description

Cooling capacity
To ensure adequate cooling of the motor, it is essential to adhere to the specified cooling water
rate, temperature and cooling water quality (Page 29).

Cooling with external fan

The machine has cooling method IC 416 in accordance with IEC / EN 60034-6. The separately
driven fan unit and the terminal box can be mounted in a different position depending on the
order.

WARNING
Improper use of the external fan
Improper use of the external fan can result in death, serious injury, and material damage.
● Observe and follow the operating instructions of the external fan.

See also
Additional documents (Page 167)

External fan
Different external fans are used depending on the shaft height and particular motor version:

Type Version External fan

1PH818. Standard version EC external fan with single-phase EC motor
1PH822. Version with option L75 External fan with three-phase motor
Version with option L76 EC external fan with three-phase EC motor
1PH828. Standard version External fan with three-phase EC motor

EC external fans with a fixed operating speed have been specifically designed for this motor
series.

Degree of protection
Depending on the version, the machine has degree of protection IP23 or IP55.

Supplementary devices
A temperature sensor is integrated in the stator winding to monitor the winding temperature.
The type of temperature sensor is specified on the rating plate.
Depending on the order options, various supplementary devices such as encoder systems can
be either installed or mounted.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 25
Description

Holding brake
Depending on the order, a special version of a holding brake from the Stromag company is
mounted. Various types of holding brake are mounted depending on the shaft height.

NOTICE
Technical data for the special version of the holding brake
The following technical data applies to the special version of the mounted holding brake. The
corresponding data in the manufacturers operating instructions do not apply.

Table 3-3 Technical data of the holding brake

Technical data NFF-A 63 NFF-A 100

AH180 AH225
Braking torque MBrake [Nm] 1000 1600
Max. speed nBrake [rpm] 3500 3100
Weight incl. hollow shaft mbrake [kg] 63 88
Moment of inertia Jbrake [kgm2] 0,022 0,051
Total moment of inertia (emer‐ Jtotal [kgm2] 1,3 3,9
gency stop)
Rated voltage U [V] 230 V (AC) 230 V (AC)
Permitted single switched energy P [W] 98 210
Coil current I [A] 2,21 2,70
Number of emergency stops Z - 2100 1200
Opening time [ms] 300 300
Closing time [ms] 80 100

Note
More information
● Commissioning (Page 87)

See also
Operating instructions, holding brake (Page 169)

Ambient conditions
The standard machines are not suitable for use in corrosive atmospheres, atmospheres with a
high salt content, or outdoor applications.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

26 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Description

Roller bearings
The machines are equipped with different types of roller bearings depending on the version and
the operating conditions described in the order. If the machine is equipped with a regreasing
system, you will find the relevant data on the machine's lubricant plate.
The following standard roller bearing versions are available:

Table 3-4 Roller bearing versions

Design Bearings
Standard design and "Performance" Drive end deep-groove ball bearing as spring-loaded floating
bearing
Non-drive end deep-groove ball bearing as fixed bearing
Version for increased radial forces Drive end cylindrical-roller bearing as floating bearing
Non-drive end deep-groove ball bearing as fixed bearing

Paint finish
The machine is painted according to the instructions in your order.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 27
Description

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

28 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Preparations for use 4
Good planning and preparation of machine applications are essential in terms of keeping
installation simple and avoiding errors, ensuring safe operation, and allowing access to the
machine for servicing and corrective maintenance.
This chapter outlines what you need to consider when configuring your plant in relation to this
machine and the preparations you need to make before the machine is delivered.

4.1 Safety-related aspects to consider when configuring the plant

A number of residual risks are associated with the machine. These are described in the chapter
titled "Safety information" (Page 15) and in related sections.
Take appropriate safety precautions (covers, barriers, markings, etc.) to ensure the machine is
operated safely within your plant.

4.2 Observing the operating mode

Observe the machine's operating mode. Use a suitable control system to prevent overspeeds,
thus protecting the machine from damage.

4.3 Cooling water quality for water-cooled motors

The values specified for the cooling water correspond to the requirements for a closed cooling
circuit. Not all of the specified concentrations will occur in the cooling water at the same time.
A filter can be used to ensure smooth operation; the grade of filtration should not exceed
100 μm.

Cooling water specification

Table 4-1 Cooling water specification

Constituent Value
pH value 6.0 … 9.0
Total hardness < 170 ppm
Conductivity < 500 μS/cm
Chloride ions < 40 ppm
Sulfate ions < 50 ppm
Nitrate ions < 50 ppm
Dissolved solids < 340 ppm
Max. grain size < 100 μm

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 29
Preparations for use
4.4 Ensuring cooling

Constituent Value
Operating pressure 6 bar max.
Inlet temperature < 30°C
Minimum cooling water inlet temperature Tcooling water > Tambient - 5 K
Anti-freeze protection / corrosion protection 20 … 30 %
Inhibitor NALCO 00GE056 0.2 … 0,25 %

Cooling water intake temperature

The maximum cooling water intake temperature is 30 °C.

NOTICE
Condensation for an excessively low cooling water intake temperature
If the temperature difference between cooling water and ambient temperature is greater than
5 K, this may result in condensation forming in the machine. This results in material damage.
● Make sure that the condensation can drain away freely.
● Adopt appropriate measures to achieve the required intake temperature of the cooling
water.
● Alternatively, dry the ambient air.

4.4 Ensuring cooling

Note
Note also the technical data on the rating plates on the motor enclosure.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

30 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Preparations for use
4.4 Ensuring cooling

Preconditions for adequate cooling

● For motors that are cooled by the ambient air, the cooling air must be able to flow unimpeded
to and from the motors. Hot discharged air should not be drawn in again.

NOTICE
Overheating
If the required cooling air flow cannot be maintained, the machine can overheat. This can
result in material damage.
● Maintain the required minimum clearance for customer-supplied mounted accessories
at the air intake opening and at the air discharge openings to ensure the required
cooling air flow.

● Comply with the conditions of the IP degree of protection.

More stringent requirements regarding the IP degree of protection may necessitate the
installation of suitable filters and special arrangement of the intake and outlet openings.
● Equipment and cables must be connected without strain.

Figure 4-1 Air guidance from the DE to the NDE (schematic representation, types 1PH818. and
1PH822.)

A bypass is available for 1PH822. with IP23 degree of protection and air guidance from the DE
to the NDE.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 31
Preparations for use
4.4 Ensuring cooling

Figure 4-2 Bypass for 1PH822. for IP23

Figure 4-3 Air guidance from the NDE to the DE (schematic representation, type 1PH828.) for IP55

External fan
The code for the external fan is at the eleventh position of the order number. The order number
– and therefore the installed external fan type – is specified on the rating plate.

Machines with pipe connection

You must mount and connect pipes and a fan of suitable type and dimensioning to machines
that are intended for the connection of pipes and/or for operation with an external fan.
Please observe the following when connecting pipes:
● Additional pressure drop in the system.
● Shipping covers on the ventilation openings must have been removed.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

32 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Preparations for use
4.5 Interlock circuit for the external fan

For machines with a pipe connection, the potential pressure drop inside the machine is given
in the following table:

Table 4-2 Pressure drop in motors with pipe connection

Type Degree of pro‐ Volume flow Pressure drop Flow resistance

tection
1PH818. IP23 0.21 m3/s 450 Pa 10204 Ns2/m8
IP55 0.17 m3/s 550 Pa 19030 Ns2/m8
1PH822. IP23 0.33 m /s
3
600 Pa 5510 Ns2/m8
IP55 0.31 m3/s 650 Pa 6760 Ns2/m8
1PH828. IP23 0.52 m3/s 600 Pa 2220 Ns2/m8
IP55 0.42 m /s
3
600 Pa 3400 Ns2/m8

4.5 Interlock circuit for the external fan

Interlock circuit for the external fan motor

For machines with external fans, install an interlock circuit that prevents the main machine
being switched on if the external fan is not operational.
Force-ventilated 1PH818. and 1PH822. motors are equipped with electronically commutated
motors (EC motor).
The electronics of the external fan equipped with EC motor can be damaged as a result of
voltage fluctuations. Supply the external fan with power from the line supply and not via a
frequency converter.

4.6 Interlock circuit for anti-condensation heating (option)

If the anti-condensation heating is operated while the machine is running, this can increase the
temperatures inside the machine.
● Install an interlock circuit that switches off the anti-condensation heating once the main
machine is switched on.
● Only switch on the anti-condensation heating after the machine has been switched off.

See also
Switching on the machine (Page 98)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 33
Preparations for use
4.7 Thermal motor protection

4.7 Thermal motor protection

The machine is equipped as standard with a temperature sensor, optionally with PTC
thermistors to directly monitor the motor temperature in order to protect the machine against
overload in operation. Plan a corresponding circuit for monitoring.

See also
Connecting the temperature sensor (Page 83)

4.8 Overheating during periodic duty

NOTICE
Non-periodic duty
In all of the operating modes, always operate the external fan according to DIN EN 60034-1.
For non-periodic operation, it is possible that the machine is thermally overloaded. This can
result in damage to the machine.
● In the case of extended non-operational periods, the fan should be in operation until the
machine has approximately reached the temperature of the coolant, see S2 duty type in
DIN EN 60034‑1.
● Use a suitable circuit to ensure that the external fan is appropriately operated.

NOTICE
EC fan control via an input signal
The fan motor can overheat if the external EC fan is operated at low fan speeds as a result of
the setpoint signal it receives.
● Monitor the motor using the integrated temperature sensors.
● Integrate the temperature monitoring into the interlocking circuit.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

34 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Preparations for use
4.9 Noise emissions

4.9 Noise emissions

Noise emissions
During operation, the machine's noise emission levels can exceed those permitted at the
workplace, which can cause hearing damage.
● Ensure that nobody is in the area of increased noise emissions during machine operation.
● Take steps to reduce noise so that the machine can be operated safely within your system.
The following measures may help to reduce noise.
– Covers
– Noise insulation
– Hearing protection measures

4.10 Rotational speed limit values

Excessive rotational speed can lead to serious damage to the machine. This can result in
death, serious injury, or material damage.
● Avoid operation above the permissible speed by using the appropriate control function.
● Observe the speeds stamped on the rating plate.

4.11 System-inherent frequencies

Excessively high vibration levels and system resonances can damage the machine set.
● Configure and match the system consisting of the foundation and machine set in such a way
that no system resonances can arise and result in the permissible vibration levels being
exceeded.
● The vibration values according to DIN ISO 10816-3 must not be exceeded.

4.12 Torsional loading of the drive train due to faults in the electrical supply
In the event of faults in the electrical connection during operation, excessive air gap torques can
lead to additional mechanical torsional load on the line shaft.

Risk of torsional stress on the drive train

If the configuration does not correctly recognize the mechanical torsional loadings of the shaft
assembly, this can lead to serious damage to the machine. This can result in death, serious
injury or material damage.
● When planning the system, consider the configuration data. The system planner is
responsible for the entire drive train.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 35
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage

4.13 Transport and storage

When carrying out any work on the machine, observe the general safety instructions (Page 15)
and the specifications contained in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical
equipment.

4.13.1 Checking the delivery

Checking the delivery for completeness

The drive systems are put together on an individual basis. When you take receipt of the
delivery, please check immediately whether the items delivered are in accordance with the
accompanying documents. Siemens will not accept any claims relating to items missing from
the delivery and which are submitted at a later date.
● Report any apparent transport damage to the delivery agent immediately. Never
commission a damaged motor.
● Report any apparent defects/missing components to the appropriate Siemens office
immediately.
These safety instructions are part of the scope of supply; keep them in a location where they
can be easily accessed.

4.13.2 Lifting and transportation

To safely lift and transport the machine, the following requirements must be met:
● Personnel operating cranes and fork-lift trucks must be appropriately qualified.
● If the motor is packed, depending on the weight, size and on-site conditions, lift crates and
transport frames using a fork-lift truck or a crane with slings. Use a crane or fork-lift truck
suitable for the load.
● When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged sling guides and spreaders
of sufficient rated capacity. Check the lifting equipment prior to its use. The weight of the
machine is shown on the rating plate.
● When lifting the machine, refer to the information on the lifting plate.
– Comply with the specified spreading angles.
– Do not exceed the maximum lifting acceleration and lifting speed specified on the lifting
plate. Lift the machine without jerking it.
Acceleration a ≤ 0.4 g (≈ 4 m/s2 )
Velocity v ≤ 20 m/min
● Use only the load carrying device on the stator frame for lifting.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

36 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage

WARNING
Transport for a different type of construction
If you do not transport or lift the machine in a position appropriate for its construction, the
machine can tip, slip into the lifting equipment or fall down. This can result in death, serious
injury or material damage.
● Use only the load carrying device on the stator frame for lifting.
● Use the load carrying device appropriate for the machine position.
● Use suitable rope guiding or spreading devices. The weight of the machine is shown on the
rating plate.

WARNING
Transport if the center of gravity is not at the center.
If the center of gravity of a load is not located centrally between the attachment points, the
motor can tip over or slip out of the lifting equipment and fall when it is being transported or
lifted. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Comply with the handling instructions on the machine when transporting it.
● Be aware of the possibility of different loads on the sling ropes or lifting straps and the
carrying capacity of the lifting equipment.
● Always take account of the center of gravity when transporting or lifting the motor. If the
center of gravity is not located centrally between the attachment points, then position the
hoisting hook above the center of gravity.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 37
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage

There are two lifting eyebolts for horizontal transport of the motor. Always transport and lift the
motor by the lifting eyebolts.
● Only lift the motor at the lifting eyebolts on the bearing end shields. To hoist the motor, in
particular if there are built-on assemblies, use suitable cable-guidance or spreading
equipment.

NOTICE
Damage to the terminal box
The terminal box can be damaged when lifting without using suitable spreading
equipment,.
Only lift the machine using suitable spreading equipment.

● Pay attention to the lifting capacity of the hoisting gear. The weight of the motor is specified
on the rating plate.

Figure 4-4 Lifting the machine (schematic representation)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

38 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage

Rotor shipping brace

Machines ordered with the "Increased radial force" option are equipped with cylindrical-roller
bearings and a rotor shipping brace.

NOTICE
Transport damage if the rotor shipping brace device is not used.
The motor can be damaged if it is jolted during transport. This can result in material damage.
● Always transport the motor with the rotor shipping brace supplied. The rotor shipping brace
must be attached during transportation.
● Only remove it before pushing on the drive element.
● If you transport the machine after the output transmission element has been pulled on, then
you must axially fix the rotor in another way.

཰
ཱ

① Sleeve
② Shaft screw
Figure 4-5 Rotor shipping brace

Table 4-3 Tightening torque and preloading force for axially fixing the rotor

Type Thread in the shaft end Tightening torque Preload

1PH818. M20 50 Nm 12 kN
1PH822. M20 50 Nm 12 kN
1PH828. M24 100 Nm 20 kN

WARNING
Lifting using the cooling water pipes
The cooling water pipe system has not been designed so that it can be used to lift the motor.
The machine can fall when lifted. Death, serious injury, or material damage will result.
● Only use the eyebolts on the bearing shields to transport and lift the motor.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 39
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage

Lifting force-ventilated motors in type of construction IM V5 with side-mounted terminal boxes

Proceed as follows if you wish to lift a machine with type of construction IM V5 and with side-
mounted terminal box:
1. Screw off the external fan.
2. Screw in the eyebolts supplied and use these to lift the machine.
3. Screw on the external fan again after the work has been completed.

4.13.3 Transporting a force-ventilated motor that has already been in operation

If you have already operated the motor and now want to transport it, proceed as follows:
1. Allow the motor to cool down.
2. Remove the connections provided by the customer.
3. Fit the rotor shipping brace.
4. Only use the eyebolts on the bearing shields to transport and lift the motor.

4.13.4 Transporting a water-cooled motor that has already been in operation

If you have already operated the motor and now want to transport it, proceed as follows:
1. Allow the motor to cool down.
2. Remove the connections provided by the customer.
3. Drain the cooling-water system and purge it carefully with air.
4. Fit the rotor shipping brace, if present.
5. Only use the eyebolts on the bearing shields - for example - to transport and lift the motor.

Note
Store the rotor locking device
Be sure to store the rotor locking device. It must be remounted for possible disassembly and
transport.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

40 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage

4.13.5 Transporting the machine set

WARNING
Falling down of the machine
The lifting lugs on the machine are designed only for the weight of the machine. If a machine
set is lifted and transported on a single machine, this can lead to mechanical failure of the
lifting lug. The machine or machine set may fall. This can result in death, serious injury or
material damage.
● Do not lift machine sets by attaching lifting tackle to the individual machines.
● Use only the equipment provided, e.g. the openings or lugs on the base plates, for
transporting machine sets. Note the maximum capacity of the lifting lug.

Note
Place the machine in a secure and raised position
In order to obtain easy and safe access to the underside of the machine, place it in a secure and
raised position.

DANGER
Standing under suspended loads
If the lifting gear or load handling attachments were to fail, the machine could fall. This can
result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Never remain under or in the immediate vicinity of the machine when it is raised.

4.13.6 Storage
You can store the machine for up to two years in dry, dust-free and vibration-free rooms without
reducing the specified storage time.

NOTICE
Seizure damage to bearings
If the motor is stored incorrectly, bearing damage can occur at standstill, e.g. brinelling, as a
result of vibration or shock.
Read the following storage instructions.

Preparation
● Fit the rotor shipping brace.
● Apply a preserving agent, for example to external components such as shaft ends, if this has
not already been applied in the factory.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 41
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage

Storing indoors

NOTICE
Damage caused as a result of outdoor storage
Storing the machine outdoors can result in it being damaged.
● Ensure that the machine is only stored in areas that comply with the following conditions.

● Store the motor in an area that meets the following criteria:

– The room must be dry, dust-free, frost-free and vibration-free. The relative humidity of
the air should be less than 60%. The temperature should not drop below ‑15 °C in
accordance with EN 60034-1.
– The room must be well ventilated.
– The room must provide protection against extreme weather conditions.
– The air in the room must not contain any harmful gases.
● Protect the motor from shocks and humidity.
● Cover the motor properly.
● Avoid contact corrosion:
– Every three months, remove the shipping brace. Rotate the shaft extension by hand.
– Then reattach the rotor shipping brace.

Protection against humidity

● If a dry storage area is not available, then take the following precautions:
– Wrap the machine in a material that absorbs moisture. Then pack the machine in an
airtight film.
– Include several bags of desiccant in the seal-tight packaging. Check the desiccant and
replace as required.
– Place a humidity meter in the airtight packaging that indicates the level of humidity inside
it.
– Inspect the motor regularly.

See also
Protect the cooling water system of water-cooled motors (Page 44)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

42 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage

4.13.7 Attaching the rotor shipping brace prior to storage

NOTICE
Bearing damage caused by vibration
If storage conditions are inappropriate there is a risk of bearing seizure damage. This can
result in material damage, such as damage to bearings caused by vibration.
● On machines that have been supplied with a rotor shipping brace, secure the rotor as per
the notes on transportation.
● Protect the machine against strong radial vibrations, since the rotor shipping brace might
not absorb these completely.

NOTICE
Bearing damage when being transported
If the customer has already mounted parts, for example coupling, belt pulley, etc., the bearing
can be damaged during transport.
● In this case, make sure that the customer uses a rotor shipping brace.

Long-term storage
If you are storing a machine for more than six months, you must check its condition every six
months.
● Check the machine for damage.
● Carry out any necessary maintenance work.
● Document all preservation measures taken so that they can be reversed before the
machines are put back into service.
● Provide air-conditioning for the storage room.

Condensation
The following factors result in condensation in the machine:
● Significant fluctuations of the ambient temperature
● Direct sunshine
● Direct exposure to the weather
● High air humidity during storage
● Intermittent operation or load fluctuations in operation

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 43
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage

Water drain holes (option L12)

Depending on the specific order, water drainage holes are provided in the bearing shields at the
DE and NDE in the foot area and opposite the regreasing system. Make sure that the
condensation can always drain away freely.
● Shaft heights 180 and 225: The plug that has been inserted into the water drainage holes
allows the condensation to drain away. Do not remove the plug, otherwise the machine's
degree of protection will be affected.
● Shaft height 280: There are no plugs in the water drain holes. The water must be able to
drain away freely.
The water drain holes only function when the motor is mounted horizontally for types of
construction IM B3, IM B35 and IM B5.

NOTICE
Damage due to condensation
If the stator winding is damp, its insulation resistance is reduced. This can result in voltage
flashovers, which can destroy the winding. Condensation can cause rusting inside the
machine.
● Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely.

4.13.8 Protect the cooling water system of water-cooled motors

When the units are delivered, the high-grade steel cooling-water pipe system is not filled with
cooling water.
● When you put the motor into storage after use, drain the cooling water ducts and purge with
air to ensure that they are completely empty.
● For operation, add a maximum of 20 % to 30 % of an anti-freeze agent to the cooling water;
use Antrifrogen N or Tyfocor, for example, as the anti-freeze.

NOTICE
Frost damage to the cooling circuit
Damage may be caused to the cooling circuit if the cooling water freezes.
If the ambient temperature falls below 0 °C during operation add anti-freeze to the cooling
water.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

44 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Preparations for use
4.14 Converter operation

4.13.9 Protection against corrosion

If the machine is stored in dry conditions, then apply the subsequently listed anti-corrosion
measures:
● Storage up to six months:
Apply a coat of corrosion protective compound to all accessible bare metal parts such as the
exposed shaft extension, flange or machine feet.
● Storage for longer than six months:
Apply a coat of long-term anti-corrosion agent to all accessible bare parts.
● Inspect the machine regularly and if necessary, apply an additional coating of corrosion
protection.
Document all preservation measures taken so that they can be reversed before the machines
are put back into service.

4.14 Converter operation

4.14.1 Connecting to a converter

Selecting and connecting the cable

● Use Motion Connect cables or symmetrically constructed, shielded cables to connect the
motor to a converter. The cable shielding, made up of as many strands as possible, must
have good electrical conductivity. Braided shields made of copper or aluminum are well
suited.
● The shield is connected at both ends, at the motor and converter. Keep unshielded cable
ends as short as possible.
● In order to ensure that high-frequency currents are efficiently discharged, provide a 360°
contact through a large surface area at the converter and at the motor. Use for instance,
EMC glands at the cable entries.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 45
Preparations for use
4.14 Converter operation

Measures to reduce bearing currents

To specifically reduce and prevent damage caused by bearing currents, consider the system
as a whole, which comprises the motor, converter, and driven machine. The following
precautions help to prevent bearing currents:
● Setting up a properly meshed grounding system in the system as a whole, with low
impedance for high-frequency currents
● No potential difference between the motor, converter, and working machine.
– Use symmetrical, shielded connecting cables.
– Connect the cable shield at both ends over the greatest possible surface area (360°
contact).
– Use equipotential bonding conductors between the motor and the driven machine as
well as between the motor and the converter
● Limit the voltage rate of rise by using an output filter to dampen harmonic components in the
output voltage

4.14.2 Converter input voltage

The insulation system of SIMOTICS machines always complies with the requirements of stress
category C (IVIC C = high stress). If voltage peaks higher than those specified according to
IVIC C can occur, then please contact your Siemens partner:
● For a line supply voltage (converter input voltage) up to max. 480 V, and when controlled
from a SINAMICS G/SINAMICS S converter with uncontrolled/controlled infeed: Comply
with the guidelines for configuring motor and converter.
● For line voltages (converter input voltages) higher than 480 V, motors, which are ordered for
converter operation, have an appropriate insulation system.
● Operation with a converter from another manufacturer: Comply with the permissible voltage
peaks according to IEC 60034-18-41 in accordance with stress category C, dependent on
the particular line voltage (converter input voltage) and the motor insulation system.

NOTICE
Material damage caused by an excessively high supply voltage
The insulation system will be damaged if the supply voltage is too high for the insulation
system. This can completely destroy the machine.
● Comply with the peak voltages as laid down in the guidelines above.

4.14.3 Insulated bearings for converter operation

If the machine is operated with a low-voltage converter such as SINAMICS G150 / S150 / S120,
then an insulated bearing and a speed encoder with insulated bearings (option) is mounted at
the non-drive end.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

46 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Preparations for use
4.14 Converter operation

For 1PH818, the insulated bearings are optional; for 1PH822 and 1PH828, insulated bearings
are standard.
Comply with the plates on the machine relating to bearing insulation and possible bridges.

 

 


① Driven machine ④ Insulated bearings
② Motor ⑤ Insulated tachometer fitting
③ Coupling
Figure 4-6 Schematic representation of a single drive

NOTICE
Bearing damage
The bearing insulation must not be bridged. Bearing currents can damage bearings.
● Also when performing subsequent installation work, e.g. installing an automatic lubrication
system or a non-insulated vibration sensor, ensure the bearing insulation is not bridged.
● Contact your Service Center, if necessary.

See also
Service and Support (Page 161)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 47
Preparations for use
4.14 Converter operation

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

48 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Mounting 5
5.1 Safety instructions for mounting
Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine:
● Comply with the general safety instructions.
● Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations.
● When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid
down in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment.

See also
Safety information (Page 15)

Injury and material damage caused by inappropriate fastening material

If screws of an incorrect property class have been selected or if they have been fastened to an
incorrect tightening torque, they may break or become loose. This will cause the machine to
move, which could damage the bearings. The rotor could smash into the machine enclosure
and machine parts could be flung out of place. This can result in death, serious injury or material
damage.
● Comply with the required property classes for screwed connections.
● Tighten the screwed connections to the specified tightening torques.

Injury and material damage caused by incorrect machine alignment

If the machine has not been properly aligned, this will mean the fastening parts are subjected
to stress/distortion. Screws may become loose or break, the machine will move, machine parts
could be flung out of place. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Carefully align the machine to the driven machine.

Material damage caused by improper handling

Mounting parts such as temperature sensors or speed sensors are attached to the machine
and could be ripped off or destroyed as a result of improper handling. This could lead to
machine malfunctions, extending even to total loss of the machine.
● Where necessary, use suitable steps when performing installation work on the machine.
● Do not stand on cables or attachments during installation. Do not use attachments as steps.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 49
Mounting
5.2 Preparing for installation

Damage to mounted parts and components as a result of high temperatures

The motor components get very hot during operation. High temperatures can damage parts
mounted by customers, such as cables manufactured out of materials that are not heat
resistant.
● Temperature-sensitive parts must not come into contact with or be attached to components
mounted on the machine.
● Only use heat-resistant mounting parts. The connecting cables and cable entries must be
suitable for the particular application.

Loss of conformity with European directives

In the delivery state, the machine corresponds to the requirements of the European directives.
Unauthorized changes or modifications to the machine lead to the loss of conformity with
European Directives and the loss of the associated warranty.

5.2 Preparing for installation

5.2.1 Requirements for installation

The following requirements must be satisfied prior to starting installation work:
● Staff have access to the operating and installation instructions.
● The machine is unpacked and ready for mounting at the installation location.
● Measure the insulation resistance of the winding before starting any installation work. If the
insulation resistance lies below the specified value, take appropriate remedial measures.
These remedial measures may necessitate the machine being removed again and
transported.

5.2.2 Insulation resistance and polarization index

Measuring the insulation resistance and polarization index (PI) provides information on the
condition of the machine. It is therefore important to check the insulation resistance and the
polarization index at the following times:
● Before starting up a machine for the first time
● After an extended period in storage or downtime
● Within the scope of maintenance work
The following information is provided regarding the state of the winding insulation:
● Is the winding head insulation conductively contaminated?
● Has the winding insulation absorbed moisture?

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

50 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Mounting
5.2 Preparing for installation

As such, you can determine whether the machine needs commissioning or any necessary
measures such as cleaning and/or drying the winding:
● Can the machine be put into operation?
● Must the windings be cleaned or dried?
Detailed information on testing and the limit values can be found here:
"Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index" (Page 51)

5.2.3 Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index

WARNING
Hazardous voltage at the terminals
During and immediately after measuring the insulation resistance or the polarization index (PI)
of the stator winding, hazardous voltages may be present at some of the terminals. Contact
with these can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● If any power cables are connected, check to make sure line supply voltage cannot be
delivered.
● Discharge the winding after measurement until the risk is eliminated, e.g. using the
following measures:
– Connect the terminals with the ground potential until the recharge voltage drops to a
non-hazardous level
– Attach the connection cable.

Measure the insulation resistance

1. Before you begin measuring the insulation resistance, please read the operating manual for
the insulation resistance meter you are going to use.
2. Short-circuit the ends of the temperature sensor cables before applying the test voltage. If
the test voltage is connected to only one temperature sensor terminal, the temperature
sensor will be destroyed.
3. Make sure that no power cables are connected.
4. Measure the winding temperature and the insulation resistance of the winding in relation to
the machine enclosure. The winding temperature should not exceed 40° C during the
measurement. Convert the measured insulation resistances in accordance with the formula
to the reference temperature of 40° C. This thereby ensures that the minimum values
specified can be compared.
5. Read out the insulation resistance one minute after applying the measuring voltage.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 51
Mounting
5.2 Preparing for installation

Limit values for the stator winding insulation resistance

The following table specifies the measuring voltage and limit values for the insulation
resistance. These values correspond to IEEE 43‑2000 recommendations.

Table 5-1 Stator winding insulation resistance at 40° C

UN Umeas RC
V V MΩ
U ≤ 1000 500 ≥5
1000 ≤ U ≤ 2500 500 (max. 1000) 100
2500 < U ≤ 5000 1000 (max. 2500)
5000 < U ≤ 12000 2500 (max. 5000)
U > 12000 5000 (max. 10000)

Urated = rated voltage, see the rating plate

Umeas = DC measuring voltage
RC = minimum insulation resistance at a reference temperature of 40 °C

Conversion to the reference temperature

When measuring with winding temperatures other than 40° C, convert the measuring value to
the reference temperature of 40° C according to the following equations from IEEE 43-2000.

(1) RC Insulation resistance converted to 40° C reference temperature

KT Temperature coefficient according to equation (2)
RC = KT · RT RT Measured insulation resistance for measuring/winding temperature T
in °C
(2) 40 Reference temperature in °C
10 Halving/doubling of the insulation resistance with 10 K
KT = (0.5) (40-T)/10 T Measuring/winding temperature in °C

In this case, doubling or halving the insulation resistance at a temperature change of 10 K is

used as the basis.
● The insulation resistance halves every time the temperature rises by 10 K.
● The resistance doubles every time the temperature falls by 10 K.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

52 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Mounting
5.2 Preparing for installation

For a winding temperature of approx. 25° C, the minimum insulation resistances are 20 MΩ
(U ≤ 1000 V) or 300 MΩ (U > 1000 V). The values apply for the complete winding to ground.
Twice the minimum values apply to the measurement of individual assemblies.
● Dry, new windings have an insulation resistance of between 100 and 2000 MΩ, or possibly
even higher values. An insulation resistance value close to the minimum value could be due
to moisture and/or dirt accumulation. The size of the winding, the rated voltage and other
characteristics affect the insulation resistance and may need to be taken into account when
determining measures.
● Over its operating lifetime, the motor winding insulation resistance can drop due to ambient
and operational influences. Calculate the critical insulation resistance value depending on
the rated voltage by multiplying the rated voltage (kV) by the specific critical resistance
value. Convert the value for the current winding temperature at the time of measurement,
see above table.

Measuring the polarization index

1. To determine the polarization index, measure the insulation resistances after one minute
and ten minutes.
2. Express the measured values as a ratio:
PI = Rinsul 10 min / Rinsul 1 min
Many measuring devices display these values automatically following the measurement.
For insulation resistances > 5000 MΩ, the measurement of the PI is no longer meaningful and
consequently not included in the assessment.

R(10 min) / R(1 min) Assessment

≥2 Insulation in good condition
<2 Dependent on the complete diagnosis of the insulation

NOTICE
Damage to insulation
If the critical insulation resistance is reached or undershot, this can damage the insulation and
cause voltage flashovers.
● Contact the service center (Page 161).
● If the measured value is close to the critical value, you must subsequently check the
insulation resistance at shorter intervals.

Limit values of the anti-condensation heating insulation resistance

The insulation resistance of the anti-condensation heating with respect to the machine housing
should not be lower than 1 MΩ when measured at 500 V DC.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 53
Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it

5.2.4 Prepare the mounting surfaces (IM B3)

● Ensure that the foundation faces are flat and clean.
● Check the dimensions of the mounting-foot holes.

5.2.5 Prepare the mounting surfaces (flange mounting)

● Clean the flange before installation, and make sure that the flange face is flat and free of
contaminations.
● Check the geometry of the flange.

5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it

5.3.1 Preconditions for correct alignment and secure attachment

Detailed specialist knowledge of the following measures is required in order to correctly align
and securely fit the equipment.
● Preparing the foundation
● Selecting and mounting the coupling
● Measuring the concentricity and axial eccentricity tolerances
● Positioning the machine
If you are not familiar with the prescribed measures and procedures, then you can make use of
the services offered by the local Service Center (Page 161).

5.3.2 Checking the load handling attachments

Inspect the load handling attachments such as the load stands, lifting eyes and ring bolts and
also the lifting gear, before lifting the machine:
● Inspect the load handling attachments on the machine for possible damage. Replace any
load handling attachments that are found to be damaged.
● Check before use that the load handling attachments are correctly secured.
● When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged lifting gear of sufficient rated
capacity. Check these before using them.

WARNING
The machine can be dropped
If the load handling attachments and lifting gear are damaged or not correctly secured, the
machine may be dropped during lifting. This can result in death, serious injury or material
damage. Inspect the load handling attachments and lifting gear before use.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

54 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it

5.3.3 Removing anti-corrosion protection

Machined, bare metallic surfaces of the motor, such as the shaft end, fitted key, foot and flange
surfaces, are treated with an anti-corrosion agent.
1. Remove this layer of anti-corrosion agent from the mounting surfaces of the motor by wiping
it away with an absorbent cloth or paper sheet.

NOTICE
Damage to the machine surface
Using metal objects such as scrapers, spatulas, or plates to remove the anti-corrosion
protection could result in damage to the surfaces of the machine parts.

2. Then lightly oil the bare surfaces again.

5.3.4 Mounting the output elements

Type of balancing
The rotor is dynamically balanced. For shaft extensions with featherkeys, the balancing type is
specified using the following coding on the face of the drive end of the shaft:

H Balancing with half a feather key

F Balancing with a full feather key
N Balancing with a plain shaft - no keyway
Figure 5-1 Balancing type on the drive-end side

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 55
Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it

Pushing on the power output elements

Preconditions
● The coupling and/or the output element must be appropriately dimensioned for the
operating case at hand.
Observe the coupling manufacturer's instructions.
● Make sure that the balancing type of the transmission element correctly matches the type
of balance of the rotor.
● Use only ready drilled and balanced transmission elements. Check the hole diameters and
the balancing status before pulling them on. Thoroughly clean the shaft extension.

Fitting
● Warm up the transmission elements to expand them before pulling them on. Select the
temperature difference for the heating process to suit the coupling diameter, fit and material.
Observe the coupling manufacturer's instructions.
● Power output elements may only be pushed on or pulled off with the correct equipment. The
output element must be pulled on in one continuous operation via the front thread holes in
the shaft or pulled on by hand.
● Do not strike it with a hammer, as this would damage the bearings.

Shaft extensions with feather key

To maintain the balancing quality, you have the following options:
● If the output element is shorter than the feather key for balancing type "H": Machine off the
section of feather key protruding from the shaft contour and output element in order to
maintain the balance quality.
● If the output element is mounted up to the shaft shoulder for motors with full-key balancing
"F", or if the output element is longer than the motor shaft extension: When balancing the
coupling or the belt pulley, take into account that the feather key does not take up all of the
hub groove.

Danger when feather keys are flung out

The feather key is only secured to prevent it falling out during transport. The feather key may
be flung out if the motor is operated without fitted transmission elements, such as coupling, etc.
This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Only operate the motor with the transmission element pulled on.
● For test operation or when commissioning without transmission element, carefully secure
the feather key using a suitable locking element. When doing this, take into account the type
of machine balancing.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

56 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it

Note
Type of balancing
In the case of shaft extensions with feather keys, the type of balancing is also included on the
rating plate next to the CE mark.

5.3.5 Lifting and transporting the machine

To safely lift and transport the machine, the following requirements must be met:
● Personnel operating cranes and fork-lift trucks must be appropriately qualified.
● If the motor is packed, depending on the weight, size and on-site conditions, lift crates and
transport frames using a fork-lift truck or a crane with slings. Use a crane or fork-lift truck
suitable for the load.
● When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged sling guides and spreaders
of sufficient rated capacity. Check the lifting equipment prior to its use. The weight of the
machine is shown on the rating plate.
● When lifting the machine, refer to the information on the lifting plate.
– Comply with the specified spreading angles.
– Do not exceed the maximum lifting acceleration and lifting speed specified on the lifting
plate. Lift the machine without jerking it.
Acceleration a ≤ 0.4 g (≈ 4 m/s2 )
Velocity v ≤ 20 m/min
● Use only the load carrying device on the stator frame for lifting.

WARNING
Transport for a different type of construction
If you do not transport or lift the machine in a position appropriate for its construction, the
machine can tip, slip into the lifting equipment or fall down. This can result in death, serious
injury or material damage.
● Use only the load carrying device on the stator frame for lifting.
● Use the load carrying device appropriate for the machine position.
● Use suitable rope guiding or spreading devices. The weight of the machine is shown on the
rating plate.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 57
Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it

WARNING
Transport if the center of gravity is not at the center.
If the center of gravity of a load is not located centrally between the attachment points, the
motor can tip over or slip out of the lifting equipment and fall when it is being transported or
lifted. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Comply with the handling instructions on the machine when transporting it.
● Be aware of the possibility of different loads on the sling ropes or lifting straps and the
carrying capacity of the lifting equipment.
● Always take account of the center of gravity when transporting or lifting the motor. If the
center of gravity is not located centrally between the attachment points, then position the
hoisting hook above the center of gravity.

Note
Place the machine in a secure and raised position
In order to obtain easy and safe access to the underside of the machine, place it in a secure and
raised position.

DANGER
Standing under suspended loads
If the lifting gear or load handling attachments were to fail, the machine could fall. This can
result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Never remain under or in the immediate vicinity of the machine when it is raised.

NOTICE
Damage due to condensation
If the stator winding is damp, its insulation resistance is reduced. This can result in voltage
flashovers, which can destroy the winding. Condensation can cause rusting inside the
machine.
● Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely.

5.3.6 Open the condensation water drain holes (water-cooled motor)

In the bearing shields at the DE and NDE, a water drain hole ① is situated in the foot area and
another opposite the regreasing device.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

58 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it

Figure 5-2 Water drain holes

● Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely.
● The plug that has been inserted into the water drain holes allows the condensation to drain
away. Do not remove the plug, otherwise the machine's degree of protection will be affected.
● If you have any questions, contact the Siemens Service Center (Page 161).

5.3.7 Open condensation drain holes (air-cooled motor, L12)

If the machine is ordered with option L12, then for types 1PH818. and 1PH822., a water drain
hole with plugs is provided in the DE and NDE bearing shields. For type 1PH828., there are
water drain holes without plugs at the DE and NDE.



Figure 5-3 Water drain holes, for types 1PH818., 1PH822.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 59
Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it

● Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely.
● The plug that has been inserted into the water drainage holes allows the condensation to
drain away. Do not remove the plug, otherwise the machine's degree of protection will be
affected.
● If you have any questions, contact the Siemens Service Center (Page 161).

5.3.8 Putting the machine down

Requirements
The following preconditions must be satisfied before setting down the machine at the
installation location:
● The mating faces must be clean.
● The anti-corrosion protection paint has been removed from the mating faces, such as the
machine mounting feet, flange, ...
● There is no condensation present within the machine.

Setting down the machine

● Set down the machine slowly and carefully at the installation location to avoid any impact.

5.3.9 Roughly aligning the machine

Requirement
The transmission element such as a coupling half has already been pulled on.

Roughly aligning the machine

● For horizontal positioning, push the motor sideways across the foundation. When doing so,
ensure that the axial position is maintained.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

60 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Mounting
5.4 Installing the machine

5.4 Installing the machine

5.4.1 Selecting fixing screws

● Unless specified otherwise, use mounting bolts with at least strength class 8.8 to ISO 898‑1.
In this way you guarantee that the machine is securely mounted and the forces can be
transferred through the torque.
● Take into account the maximum forces occurring in the case of a fault such as short circuit
or system transfers in phase opposition.
– When selecting the bolts
– When designing the foundation

See also
Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections (Page 163)

5.4.2 Preconditions for smooth, vibration-free operation

Preconditions for smooth, vibration-free operation:
● Stable foundation design
● Precise alignment of the machine
● Correct balancing of parts to be fitted to the shaft end.
● Maintaining the vibration velocity according to ISO 10816‑3

5.4.3 Vibration severity

Due to the influencing variables listed below, the vibration response of the system at the site of
operation can lead to increased vibration severity at the motor:
● Transmission elements
● Assembly conditions
● Alignment and installation
● Effects of external vibrations
Under certain circumstances, the rotor may have to be balanced completely with the output
element.
Please take care to ensure that the vibration severity specified in accordance with ISO 10816
is not exceeded at the defined measuring points on the motor. By doing this, you can ensure
problem-free operation and a long service life.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 61
Mounting
5.4 Installing the machine

Maximum permitted vibration severity

The values for the maximum permitted radial and axial vibration severity must both be
maintained.

Table 5-2 Maximum permitted radial vibration severity

Vibration frequency Vibration values1)

< 6.3 Hz Vibration displacement s ≤ 0.25 mm
6.3 to 63 Hz Vibration velocity vrms ≤ 7.1 mm/s
> 63 Hz Vibration acceleration a ≤ 4.0 m/s2

Table 5-3 Maximum permitted axial vibration severity

Vibration velocity Vibration acceleration

vrms = 7.1 mm/s apeak = 3.55 m/s2
P

Dื
P








P
Vื

Vt

 

Figure 5-4 Max. permissible vibration velocity, taking into account the vibration displacement and
vibration acceleration

To measure the vibration velocity, the measuring equipment must fulfill the requirements of
ISO 2954.
The vibration acceleration must be measured as a peak value in the time domain in a frequency
band of 10 to 2000 Hz.
If excitation in excess of 2000 Hz (e.g. gear tooth meshing frequencies) is to be expected, then
you must adapt the measuring range accordingly. This does not alter the maximum permissible
values.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

62 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Mounting
5.4 Installing the machine

5.4.4 Aligning to the driven machine

Vertical and horizontal alignment

The following measures are required in order to compensate any radial offset at the coupling
and to horizontally adjust the motor with respect to the driven machine:
● The contact surfaces of the motor feet must lie on one plane. Place shims under the motor
feet to position it vertically and to prevent any stress/distortion. The number of shims should
be kept as low as possible, so use as few thicker shims as possible, instead of several
thinner shims.
● Shift the motor to the side on the foundation for horizontal positioning. Pay attention to
maintaining the axial position.
● When positioning the motor, ensure that a uniform axial gap is maintained around the
coupling.

Alignment accuracy

Note
Alignment accuracy
Remember to take account of data concerning the alignment accuracy of the driven load and
the coupling.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 63
Mounting
5.4 Installing the machine

1. Align the motors with coupling output in such a manner that the center lines of the shafts are
parallel with no offset. This ensures that no additional forces affect their bearings during
operation.
2. Perform the fine adjustments with plates under the entire motor foot.

 

š'

\
Figure 5-5 Aligning the motor

Table 5-4 Permissible deviations when aligning the motor

Permissible deviations Radial shaft offset [x] Axial shaft offset [y]
Flexible coupling 0.05 mm 0.05 mm

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

64 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Mounting
5.5 Connecting the cooling water supply

5.4.5 Mounting the motor

Fixing by means of motor feet

● Select foot screws as per ISO 898-1 in compliance with the loading conditions and machine
type:
● Use foot screws with a minimum property class of 8.8.
● Pin the mounting feet to the customer foundation for motors with types of construction B6,
B7, B8, V5 and V6.

Type Foot screw size

1PH818. M12
1PH822. M16
1PH828. M20

Flange mounting
The flange is only used to transfer the torque. Due to the empty weight or as a result of
vibrations that arise if the flange is too soft, the motor can be damaged if it is only fastened via
the flange.
1. Fasten the flange-mounted motors via a stable motor suspension and support them via the
end shield feet (foot flange type of construction).
2. During commissioning, ensure that the permitted vibration values are maintained in
accordance with ISO 10816‑3.
If the motor is to be only flange mounted, then the maximum speed nmax is reduced for rigid
foundations according to the following table:

Type Maximum speed nmax

1PH818. 3000 1/min
1PH822. 2500 1/min
1PH828. 2000 1/min

Maximum speed for a rigid foundation and flange mounting

5.5 Connecting the cooling water supply

The inlet and outlet sockets for the cooling water supply are situated on the non-drive end in the
bearing shield area. On the bearing shield, there are two hexagonal couplers with a female
thread, which are each screwed onto a washer: At shaft heights of 180 and 225, hexagonal
couplers with 3/8" female threads are used, at a shaft height of 280 1/2" female threads are
used.
1. Only use valves, fittings and cooling water pipes made of rust-proof, stainless steel in the
cooling system.
2. Make sure that the cooling water meets the required cooling water specification, see section
headed "Cooling Water Quality" (Page 29).

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 65
Mounting
5.6 Refitting the external fan

3. Make sure that the appropriate volume of cooling water is available, see Rating Plate
(Page 21).
4. Hold the hexagon head with an open-ended wrench while you screw in the water pipes.
5. Screw the cooling water pipes into the female thread. You can connect the inlet and outlet
as required.

NOTICE
Securing the hexagonal couplers
The hexagonal couplers are connected directly to the water pipes inside the machine.
Applying excessive torque when screwing in can damage the pipe system.
Hold the couplers steady with an open-ended wrench when you screw in the water pipes.

6. Ensure that the maximum permissible operating pressure does not exceed 6 bar.
The pressure drop is determined by the machine type and the shaft height:

Table 5-5 Rate of flow and pressure drop

Type Flow rate Pressure drop

1PH8 184 15 l/min 0.6 bar
1PH8 186 15 l/min 0.7 bar
1PH8 224 20 l/min 0.6 bar
1PH8 226 20 l/min 0.6 bar
1PH8 228 20 l/min 0.6 bar
1PH8 284 35 l/min 0.6 bar
1PH8 286 35 l/min 0.6 bar
1PH8 288 35 l/min 0.6 bar

5.6 Refitting the external fan

Subsequently changing the air flow direction from NDE to DE or vice versa must only be carried
out by qualified personnel or a Siemens Service Center (Page 161).

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

66 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Electrical connection 6
6.1 Safety instructions for the electrical connection
Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine:
● Comply with the general safety instructions.
● Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations.
● When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid
down in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment.

See also
Safety information (Page 15)

Material damage as a result of connection parts coming loose

If you use fixing elements made from the wrong material or apply the wrong tightening torque,
this could impair current transfer or cause connecting parts to become loose. This could result
in material damage to the machine or even in total failure, which could in turn lead indirectly to
material damage to the system.
● Tighten the screwed connections to the specified tightening torques.
● Observe any specifications regarding the materials from which fixing elements must be
made.
● When performing servicing, check the fastenings.

See also
Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections (Page 163)

Electrostatically sensitive devices

The DRIVE-CLiQ interface contains components that are susceptible to electrostatic charging.
Touching connections with electrostatically charged hands or tools can cause malfunctions.
● Maintain the ESD protective measures (Page 18) as well as the 5 safety rules (Page 15).

Note
Service Center
If you require support when electrically connecting up the machine, please contact the Service
Center (Page 161).

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 67
Electrical connection
6.2 Preparation

6.2 Preparation

6.2.1 Selecting cables

Take the following criteria into account when selecting the connecting cables:
● Rated current
● Rated voltage
● If required, service factor
● System-dependent conditions, such as ambient temperature, routing type, cable cross-
section as defined by required length of cable, etc.
● Configuration notes
● Requirements according to IEC/EN 60204‑1

6.2.2 Connect up the ground conductor

The grounding conductor of the motor must be in full conformance with the installation
regulations, e.g. in accordance with IEC/EN 60204-1.
● Connect the ground conductor to the end shield of the motor. There is a fixing lug ① for the
ground conductor at the designated connection point.
– The fixing lug ① is suitable for grounding high-frequency currents using HF ribbon cable
with appropriately formed conductor ends.
● When making connections, ensure the following:
– the connecting surface is bare and protected against corrosion using a suitable
substance, e.g. acid-free Vaseline
– the flat and spring washers are located under the bolt head.

཰
Figure 6-1 Terminal lug ① for the grounding conductor for a force-ventilated motor

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

68 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Electrical connection
6.3 Connecting

཰
Figure 6-2 Terminal lug ① for the grounding conductor for a water-cooled motor

6.3 Connecting
Depending on the version, different terminal boxes may be installed on the machine.
Depending on the terminal box, different cable entries and options for the cable connection are
possible. You can identify the terminal box installed on the machine via the illustrations in the
following chapters.

6.3.1 Circuit diagram

Data on the connection and connecting the motor winding can be found in the circuit diagram
in the cover of the terminal box.

6.3.2 Terminal designation

According to IEC / EN 60034‑8, the following basic definitions apply to the terminal
designations for 3-phase machines:

Table 6-1 Terminal designations using the 1U1-1 as an example

1 U 1 - 1 Designation
x Index for pole assignment for pole-changing machines where applicable. A lower
index signifies a lower speed. Special case for split winding.
x Phase designation U, V, W
x Index for winding start (1) or end (2) or if there is more than one connection per
winding
x Additional indices for cases in which it is obligatory to connect parallel power feed
cables to several terminals with otherwise identical designations

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 69
Electrical connection
6.3 Connecting

6.3.3 Laying cables

● Lay the cables in accordance with IEC/EN 60364-5-52.
● Use EMC cable glands for fixed cables. Screw the EMC cable glands into the threaded
holes in the entry plate, which can be unscrewed.
● Use shielded cables whose shields are conductively connected to a large area of the
terminal box of the motor via EMC cable glands.
● In the case of aluminum connecting bars, insert a steel washer between the cable lug and
the connecting bar. This prevents contact corrosion.
● Arrange the exposed connecting cables in the terminal box so that the PE conductor has
excess length and the insulation of the cable strands cannot be damaged.
● Close off unused bushings with a metal threaded plug. This is the way to achieve a high
frequency-proof shielding.

6.3.4 Electrical connection data

Cable entry and technical connection data depend on the mounted terminal box. You can find
more information on the terminal box that is mounted in the ordering documentation or in the
catalog.

 
   










1XB7 322 1XB7 422

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

70 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Electrical connection
6.3 Connecting

  
 
















1XB7 700 1XB7 712 (*)

① main terminal ③ signal connection terminal
② ground terminal ④ signal connection

Table 6-2 Data for electrical connection

Terminal box type 1XB7 322 1XB7 422 1XB7 700 1XB7 712 (*)
Cable entry 2 x M50 x 1.5 2 x M63 x 1.5 3 x M75 x 1.5 4 x M75 x 1.5
Max. poss. cable outer diameter 38 mm 53 mm 68 mm 68 mm
Number of main terminals 3 x M12 3 x M12 3 x 3 x M12 3 x 4 x M16
Max. cross-section per terminal 2 x 50 mm2 2 x 70 mm2 3 x 150 mm2 4 x 185 mm2
Max. current per terminal ① 210 A 270 A 700 A 1150 A
Number of ground terminals 4 x M6 4 x M8 Terminal strip 4 x M16
①
Current carrying capacity based on IEC / EN 60204-1 or IEC / EN 60364-5-32

6.3.5 Connection with cable lugs

1. To connect the cables to the main terminals, select cable lugs that match the necessary
cable cross-section and appropriate screw size.
The connectable cable cross section is determined by the cable lug size for example.
– Cable lug in accordance with DIN 46234 from 35 mm2 to 185 mm2,
– Cable lug in accordance with DIN 46235 from 35 mm2 to 185 mm2.
Observe the possible outer diameter of the connecting cable in the chapter entitled
"Electrical connection data".
Connect only one conductor per cable lug.
2. Remove the insulation from the conductor ends so that the remaining insulation is almost
long enough to reach the cable lug.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 71
Electrical connection
6.3 Connecting

3. Fasten the cable lug to the end of the conductor correctly, e.g. by crimping.
4. If necessary, insulate the cable lugs in order to maintain the minimum clearances of 10 mm
and the 20 mm creepage distance, which are normally available.
The tightening torque for contact nuts and fixing screws depends on the size of the screw,
see Case A in the table in Chapter Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections
(Page 163).

Connection using a cable lug at terminal boxes 1XB7 322 / 1XB7 422

① Customer connecting cable

② Internal motor connecting cable
③ Copper spacer ring

Connection using a cable lug at terminal boxes 1XB7 700 / 1XB7 712

① Customer connecting cable

② Connection bar

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

72 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Electrical connection
6.3 Connecting

See also
Electrical connection data (Page 70)

6.3.6 Connecting aluminum conductors

If you are using aluminum conductors, comply in addition with the following:
● Use only cable lugs that are suitable for connecting aluminum conductors.
● Immediately before inserting the aluminum conductor, remove the oxide layer from the
contact areas on the conductor and/or the mating piece, by brushing or filing.
● Then grease the contact areas immediately using neutral vaseline in order to avoid re-
oxidation.

NOTICE
Aluminum flow due to contact pressure
Aluminum flows following installation due to the contact pressure. The connection with the
clamping nuts can loosen as a result. The contact resistance would increase and the
current-carrying impeded; as a consequence the terminal box and the surrounding
components could burn. This could result in material damage to the machine or even in
total failure, which could in turn lead to indirect material damage to the system.
Retighten the clamping nuts after approximately 24 hours and then again after
approximately four weeks. Make sure that the terminals are de-energized before you
tighten the nuts.

6.3.7 Stepless mating face for the seal in the terminal box cover
The sealing face of the terminal box cover is formed by the terminal box enclosure and the cable
entry element. Therefore make sure these parts are correctly aligned, so as to ensure the seal
and hence the degree of protection.
Align the cable entry support and the cable entry plate to the terminal box enclosure so that the
sealing surface between the terminal box and the terminal box cover form a flat face. There
must be no steps in the sealing area.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 73
Electrical connection
6.3 Connecting

6.3.8 Performing connection operations

1. Before closing the terminal box, please check that:
– The electrical connections in the terminal box are tight and are in full compliance with the
specifications above.
– The required clearances in air of 10 mm are maintained.
– Wire ends do not protrude.
– The inside of the terminal box is clean and free of any cable debris.
– All seals and sealing surfaces are undamaged.
– The connecting cables are arranged so that they do not come into contact with the
machine, and the cable insulation cannot be damaged.
– unused entry points are sealed. The sealing elements are firmly screwed in, i.e. they can
only be removed with a tool.
– The cable/conductor glands are fitted compliant with the specifications regarding degree
of protection, cable routing type, permissible cable diameter etc.
2. Then close the terminal box with the terminal box cover fixing screws.

See also
Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections (Page 163)

6.3.9 Internal equipotential bonding

The internal equipotential bonding between the grounding terminal in the box enclosure and the
motor frame is established through the terminal box retaining bolts. The contact locations
underneath the bolt heads are bare metal and protected against corrosion.
The standard cover fixing screws are sufficient for equipotential bonding between the terminal
box cover and terminal box housing.

Note
Connecting points are available at the frame or bearing end shield to connect an external
protective conductor or potential bonding connector.

See also
Connect up the ground conductor (Page 68)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

74 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits

6.4 Auxiliary circuits

6.4.1 Selecting cables

Take the following criteria into account when selecting the connecting cables for the auxiliary
circuits:
● Rated current
● Rated voltage
● System-dependent conditions, such as ambient temperature, routing type, cable cross-
section as defined by required length of cable, etc.
● Requirements according to IEC/EN 60204‑1

6.4.2 Connecting an external fan

Preconditions
● Only use cables that comply with the relevant installation regulations regarding voltage,
current, insulation material, and load-carrying capacity.
● Before connecting the device, make sure that the line voltage matches the device voltage.
● Check whether the data on the fan rating plate matches the connection data.
● Cable glands are not included in the scope of supply. Close unused cable entries,
otherwise, the degree of protection is not maintained.
● The line voltage corresponds to the quality attributes laid down in DIN EN 50160 and the
defined standard voltages laid down in DIN IEC 60038.

Procedure
1. Open the terminal box of the external fan and route the cables into it. The cables are not
included in the scope of supply.
2. Connect the protective conductor (PE).
3. Connect the other cables to the relevant terminals, refer to the connection diagram in the
terminal box.
Connection cables must not be subject to excessive tensile stress.
Note
For fans equipped with EC motor, the fan motor starts with a delay after the line voltage is
connected.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 75
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits

Protection against humidity

Protect the external fan against moisture. Water must not be allowed to run along the cables
and into the terminal box of the external fan.
● Use suitable cables at the connection cable gland on the terminal box.
● Attach the terminal box cover of the external fan orrectly and completely.

WARNING
Voltages at the internal motor connections
The motor may continue running, e.g. due to airflow, or may run on after being shut down. This
means that dangerous voltages of over 50 V can occur at the internal motor connections. This
can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● For safety reasons, it is not permissible to make any unauthorized modifications or
changes to the fan.
● Wait until the external fan has come to a standstill before approaching it.
● Provide a protective circuit that prevents the main motor from being switched on when the
external fan is not in operation.
– After a power failure or when the power has been disconnected, the external fan starts
up automatically again when the voltage is restored.
– The external fan can automatically switch on and switch off as a result of its inherent
function.

See also
Interlock circuit for the external fan (Page 33)

NOTICE
Overheating when the factory-installed jumper is removed
If the company operating the plant or system removes the jumper in the EC fan terminal box
(which was inserted in the factory), then that company becomes responsible for the functional
safety of the drive. The motor can overheat. This can result in material damage.
● Carefully follow the safety instructions.

Supply values

Type Option Fan Supply voltage Power consumption*

1PH818. Standard Single-phase 1~ AC 200 … 277 V (±10 %) 1.1 A ... 1.3 A
EC 50/60 Hz ±10 %
1PH818. L76 Three-phase 3~ AC 380 … 480 V (-5 %/+10 %) 0.44 A ... 0.5 A
EC 50/60 Hz ±10 %
1PH822. Standard Single-phase 1~ AC 200 … 277 V (±10 %) 2.0 A ... 2.3 A
EC 50/60 Hz ±10 %

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

76 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits

1PH822. L76 Three-phase 3~ AC 380 … 480 V (-5 %/+10 %) 0.75 A ... 0.9 A
EC 50/60 Hz ±10 %
1PH828. Standard Three-phase 3~ AC 380 … 480 V (-5 %/+10 %) 0.75 A ... 0.9 A
EC 50/60 Hz ±10 %

Connection values for external fans

* For EC fans, as a result of the electronic input circuitry, the current drawn can briefly reach four times the
specified current.

See also
Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180 (Page 249)

6.4.2.1 Connecting an EC external fan

The external fan is connected in the external fan terminal box. If necessary, you can rotate the
external fan through 90°.

Figure 6-3 External fan terminal box ① (schematic representation)

NOTICE
Short circuit due to standing water
Water that accumulates at the cable glands can result in a short circuit.
● It is not permissible that the cable outlet points upward.
● Rotate the terminal box cover of the external fan through 180°.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 77
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits

See also
Interlock circuit for the external fan (Page 33)

6.4.2.2 Connecting an external fan with three-phase motor (option L75)

The external fan is connected in the external fan terminal box.

Figure 6-4 External fan terminal box ① (schematic representation)

NOTICE
An external fan is only suitable for one direction of rotation
The external fan is only designed for one direction of rotation corresponding to the direction of
rotation arrow. Operation with the wrong direction of rotation can cause overheating or
destruction of the motor.
● Ensure that the external fan is operated in the proper direction of rotation. The direction-of-
rotation arrow and the direction of movement of the fan impeller are indicated on the rear
side of the blower.
● If necessary, change the direction of rotation by interchanging two phase conductors in the
external fan terminal box.

See also
Interlock circuit for the external fan (Page 33)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

78 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits

6.4.2.3 Supply values for external fans with three-phase motor (option L75)

Supply values
The external fan with three-phase motor has a terminal box that is mounted on the external fan
motor.

Air-flow direction 3 AC 400 V 3 AC 400 V 3 AC 480 V Sound pressure level LpA Air flow
/ 50 Hz / 60 Hz (1) / 60 Hz (1) (1 m) rate at 50
(±10 %) (±10 %) (+5 %, Motor + external fan unit Hz, ap‐
-10 %) prox.
50 Hz operation
Tolerance +3 dB
Rated pulse frequency
2 kHz
[A] [A] [A] [dB] [m3/s]
1PH8 forced ventilation degree of protection IP55, option L75
1PH818.-...0.-...1-Z DE → NDE 2.25 2.25 1.98 76 (2) 0.17
1PH818.-...1.-...1-Z NDE → DE
1PH822.-...0.-...1-Z DE → NDE 2.25 2.25 1.98 76 (2) 0.31
1PH822.-...1.-...1-Z NDE → DE
1PH8 open-circuit ventilated, degree of protection IP23, option L75
1PH818.-...3.-...1-Z DE → NDE 2.25 2.25 1.98 76 (3) 0.21
1PH818.-...4.-...1-Z NDE → DE
1PH822.-...3.-...1-Z DE → NDE 2.25 2.25 1.98 76 (3) 0.33
1PH822.-...4.-...1-Z NDE → DE
(1)
60 Hz operation only permissible with throttle plate
(2)
Speed ranges: 1PH818. up to 5000 rpm, 1PH822. up to 3500 rpm
(3)
Speed ranges: 1PH818. up to 3000 rpm, 1PH822. up to 2000 rpm
1. Connect the power supply in the terminal box. The terminal diagram is in the terminal box
cover.

① Terminal box of the external fan

② Cable entry

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 79
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits

NOTICE
Incorrect direction of rotation
The external fan is only suitable for one direction of rotation. Operation with the wrong
direction of rotation can destroy the motor.
● If necessary, change the direction of rotation by interchanging two phase conductors in the
terminal box. The direction of rotation arrow and the direction of rotation of the fan impeller
can be seen at the rear of the fan.

6.4.2.4 Attached air discharge throttle plate (option L75)

When operated from a 60 Hz line supply, you require the air discharge throttle plate provided
in the terminal box.

NOTICE
Operation without air discharge throttle plate
The external fan motor can be damaged if it is operated on a 60 Hz line supply without air
discharge throttle plate.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

80 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits

● Screw the air discharge throttle plate ② to the air discharge mesh.

 

① Fixing screws for air discharge throttle metal plate

② Air discharge throttle metal plate
Figure 6-5 Throttle plate for suction-type ventilation (DE to NDE)

① Fixing screws for air discharge throttle metal plate

② Air discharge throttle metal plate
Figure 6-6 Throttle plate for forced-draft ventilation (NDE to DE)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 81
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits

6.4.3 Connecting the speed encoder

The speed encoder is connected at the terminal box using a plug connection ①. This is located
on the terminal box enclosure.


Figure 6-7 Detailed view: Plug-in connection

Note
The plug-in connection may differ from the standard layout in the case of special orders. For
versions without speed encoder, connection thread M16x1.5 is located here.

Connecting a speed encoder via DRIVE-CLiQ

The signal connection between the motor and the converter is established via the DRIVE‑CLiQ
cable MOTION‑CONNECT.
● Always use prefabricated cables from Siemens. These cables reduce the mounting/
installation time and costs and increase operational reliability.
● Push the connector of the DRIVE‑CLiQ cable into the socket until the catch spring latches
into place. Pay attention to the coding of the connector.

Cable outlet directions

The sensor module is mounted on the motor terminal box. The sensor module can be rotated
through approximately 235°. You can change the cable outlet directions by rotating the sensor
module, as shown in the diagram below.

NOTICE
Damage to the sensor module
You can damage the sensor module if you turn it with a pipe wrench, a hammer, or similar
tools.
Turn the sensor module by hand. The typical torque is approx. 4 ... 8 Nm.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

82 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits

r 


Figure 6-8 Sensor Module ① mounted on the terminal box

NOTICE
Modifying the cable outlet direction
Changing the cable outlet direction by any improper means will damage the connecting
cables.
The permissible rotation range must not be exceeded. A maximum of ten changes to the
rotation angle of the Sensor Module are permissible within the rotation range.

6.4.4 Connect the holding brake

Information for electrically connecting the holding brake can be found in the operating
instructions supplied by the manufacturer in the (Page 169) appendix.

6.4.5 Connecting the temperature sensor

● The temperature sensor is connected to the signal connector together with the speed
encoder signal.
● For the version without speed encoder, the temperature sensor is connected at the terminal
strip.
● The motor has a reserve temperature sensor, which is also connected at the auxiliary
terminal strip. Reconnect the temperature sensor as needed, e.g. if the previous
temperature sensor fails.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 83
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits

WARNING
Risk of electric shock
The insulation of the temperature sensors for the winding monitoring with respect to the
winding is implemented according to the requirements for basic insulation. The temperature
sensor connections are located in terminal boxes, safe to touch - and have no protective
separation. This is the reason that in the case of a fault, a hazardous voltage can be present
at the measuring sensor cable. When touched, this can result in death, severe bodily injury
and material damage.
● When connecting the temperature sensor to external temperature monitoring devices,
when required, apply additional measures to fully comply with the requirements set out in
IEC 60664-1 or IEC 61800-5-1 "Hazard due to electric shock".

6.4.6 Connecting to a converter

Selecting and connecting the cable

● Use Motion Connect cables or symmetrically constructed, shielded cables to connect the
motor to a converter. The cable shielding, made up of as many strands as possible, must
have good electrical conductivity. Braided shields made of copper or aluminum are well
suited.
● The shield is connected at both ends, at the motor and converter. Keep unshielded cable
ends as short as possible.
● In order to ensure that high-frequency currents are efficiently discharged, provide a 360°
contact through a large surface area at the converter and at the motor. Use for instance,
EMC glands at the cable entries.

Measures to reduce bearing currents

To specifically reduce and prevent damage caused by bearing currents, consider the system
as a whole, which comprises the motor, converter, and driven machine. The following
precautions help to prevent bearing currents:
● Setting up a properly meshed grounding system in the system as a whole, with low
impedance for high-frequency currents
● No potential difference between the motor, converter, and working machine.
– Use symmetrical, shielded connecting cables.
– Connect the cable shield at both ends over the greatest possible surface area (360°
contact).
– Use equipotential bonding conductors between the motor and the driven machine as
well as between the motor and the converter
● Limit the voltage rate of rise by using an output filter to dampen harmonic components in the
output voltage

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

84 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits

6.4.7 Converter operation on a grounded network

NOTICE
Damage resulting from protective conductor currents
When the machine is operated on a converter with current limiter, but without ground-fault
monitoring, protective conductor currents of up to 1.7 times the external conductor current can
arise if there is a ground fault on the output side. Neither the PE conductors of normally rated
multi-core connecting cables nor the PE connecting points of normal terminal boxes are
suitable for this purpose. Material damage can result.
● Use an appropriately sized PE conductor.
● Connect the PE conductor to the grounding terminal on the motor enclosure.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 85
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

86 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Commissioning 7
Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine:
● Comply with the general safety instructions
● Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations.
● When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid
down in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment.

See also
Safety information (Page 15)

WARNING
Magnetic field when the holding brake is open
If the motor is equipped with a holding brake, then the shaft extension is magnetized when the
holding brake is open, i.e. if a voltage is connected to it.
Magnetic objects will then be suddenly attracted as a result of this magnetic field. This can
result in death, severe injury or material damage.
● Working close to the shaft extension is only permissible in exceptional, justified cases.
Clear access rules must be applied and complied with corresponding to magnetic fields at
the workplace. Clearly mark the boundaries of the areas where standing is permitted.
● People who need to use electronic or magnetic medical aids such as pacemakers, hearing
aids, implants or similar devices, are at particularly high risk. Such persons must undergo
an occupational health assessment.
● Observe the following measures.

Personal protective measures

● Ensure that you never wear or carry any of the following objects and that they are kept a safe
distance from the machine:
– All kinds of magnetic metal parts such as, keys, glasses, tools, knives, scissors, tape
measures, etc.
– Magnetic jewelry such as rings, chains, needles, watches, etc.
– Electronic devices and data carriers such as service cards, check cards, credit cards,
calculators, cell phones, etc.
– Wallets or other iron-containing objects
– Electrically conductive foreign bodies
● Do not use any magnetic tools or lifting devices.
● Wear only occupational safety items without magnetic metal parts, e.g. occupational safety
shoes with non-magnetic protective caps and soles.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 87
Commissioning
7.1 Insulation resistance and polarization index

● Keep your shoes and clothing free from chips and waste containing iron.
● Exercise caution when installing accessories. Ensure that no parts fall into the inside of the
machine.
● Do not perform any cutting at the machine, e.g. drilling threaded holes. Any exceptions
require written approval from the manufacturer.

See also
The 5 safety rules (Page 15)

7.1 Insulation resistance and polarization index

Measuring the insulation resistance and polarization index (PI) provides information on the
condition of the machine. It is therefore important to check the insulation resistance and the
polarization index at the following times:
● Before starting up a machine for the first time
● After an extended period in storage or downtime
● Within the scope of maintenance work
The following information is provided regarding the state of the winding insulation:
● Is the winding head insulation conductively contaminated?
● Has the winding insulation absorbed moisture?
As such, you can determine whether the machine needs commissioning or any necessary
measures such as cleaning and/or drying the winding:
● Can the machine be put into operation?
● Must the windings be cleaned or dried?
Detailed information on testing and the limit values can be found here:
"Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index" (Page 51)

NOTICE
Damage to the converter
The electronics of the integrated converter can be destroyed when measuring the insulation
resistance at the EC external fan.
● Do not measure the insulation resistance of the EC external fan.
● More information can be found in the instructions of the EC external fan.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

88 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Commissioning
7.2 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning

7.2 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning

Once the system has been correctly installed, you should check the following prior to
commissioning:

Note
Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning
The following list of checks to be performed prior to commissioning does not claim to be
complete. It may be necessary to perform further checks and tests in accordance with the
specific situation on-site.

● The machine is undamaged.

● The machine has been correctly installed and aligned, the transmission elements are
correctly balanced and adjusted.
● All fixing screws, connection elements, and electrical connections have been tightened to
the specified tightening torques.
● The operating conditions match the data provided in accordance with the technical
documentation, such as degree of protection, ambient temperature, etc..
● Moving parts such as the coupling move freely.
● All touch protection measures for moving and live parts have been taken.

● For test operation or when commissioning without output element, carefully secure the
feather key using a suitable security element. When doing this, take into account the
balancing type of the motor.

● If the second shaft extension is not in use, its feather key is secured to prevent it from being
thrown out, and cut back to roughly half its length if the rotor has balancing type "H"
(standard type). The unused shaft extension is covered and protected against accidental
contact.

● The rotor can spin without coming into contact with the stator.
● The bearing insulation is not bridged.

Electrical connection
● The grounding and equipotential bonding connections have been made correctly.
● The machine is connected so that it rotates in the direction specified.
● Appropriately configured control and speed monitoring functions ensure that the motor
cannot exceed the permissible speeds specified in the technical data. For this purpose,
compare the data on the rating plate or, if necessary, the system-specific documentation.
● The minimum insulation resistance values are within tolerance.
● Minimum air clearances have been maintained.
● Any supplementary motor monitoring devices and equipment have been correctly
connected and are functioning correctly.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 89
Commissioning
7.2 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning

● All brakes and backstops are operating correctly.

● At the monitoring devices, the values for "Warning" and "Shutdown" are set.

● Appropriately configured control and speed monitoring functions ensure that the the
permissible speeds specified on the rating plate cannot be exceeded.
● Any supplementary motor monitoring devices and equipment have been correctly
connected and are fully functional.

Converter operation
● If the design of the motor requires connection to a particular converter type, the rating plate
will contain corresponding additional information.
● The converter is correctly parameterized. The parameterization data is specified on the
rating plate of the machine. Information about the parameters is available in the operating
instructions for the converter.
● Any supplementary motor monitoring devices and equipment have been correctly
connected and are functioning correctly.

Roller bearing
● If the motor has been stored for more than two years in a dry, dust-free and vibration-free
room, prepare for commissioning as follows:
– Replace the rolling-contact bearings on motors with lifetime lubrication.
– Replace the grease in motors with re-greasing system.
– If stored under less favorable conditions, the bearings or the grease must be replaced
after a storage period of approx. 18 months.

Table 7-1 Minimum radial forces

Type Minimum radial force

1PH818. 4 kN
1PH822. 5 kN
1PH828. 9 kN

External fan
● All external fans fitted are ready for operation and have been connected so that they rotate
in the direction specified.
● The flow of cooling air is not impeded.

Cooling water supply

● The cooling water supply is connected and ready for operation.
● The cooling water supply is switched on. The data can be found on the rating plate.
● Cooling water is available in the configured quality and quantity.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

90 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Commissioning
7.3 Perform a test run with the water-cooled motor

7.3 Perform a test run with the water-cooled motor

If you want to start the machine for a trial run, ensure that it is connected to the cooling water
supply.

WARNING
Risk of burning from hot steam
If the cooling water supply fails, the motor will overheat. If cooling water runs into the hot
machine, hot steam suddenly forms, which escapes under high pressure. The cooling water
system can burst. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Do not connect the cooling water supply until the machine has cooled down.

7.4 Switching on
● See the operating instructions of the frequency converter for switching on.
● Before you switch on the motor, ensure that the parameters of the frequency converter have
been assigned correctly.
● Use appropriate commissioning tools, such as "Drive ES" or "STARTER".

NOTICE
Operation noise or abnormal noises
The motor can be damaged by improper handling during transport, storage or set up. If a
damaged motor is operated damage to the winding, bearings or, complete destruction of
the motor can be the result.
If the motor is not running smoothly or is emitting abnormal noises, de-energize it, and
determine the cause of the fault as the motor runs down.

Maximum speed
The maximum rotational speed nmax is the highest permissible operating speed. The maximum
rotational speed is specified on the rating plate.

See also
Description (Page 21)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 91
Commissioning
7.5 Test run

7.5 Test run

After installation or inspection, carry out a test run:
1. Switch on the cooling systems.
2. Start up the machine without a load. To do this, close the circuit breaker and do not switch
off prematurely. Check whether it is running smoothly.
Switching the machine off again while it is starting up and still running at slow speed should
be kept to a bare minimum, for example for checking the direction of rotation or for checking
in general.
Allow the machine to run down before switching it on again.
3. If it runs perfectly, connect a load.
4. During the test run, check and document the following:
– Check whether it is running smoothly.
– Document the voltage, current and power values. As far as possible, document the
corresponding values of the driven machine.
– If this is possible using the available measuring equipment, check the bearing and stator
winding temperatures until they have reached steady-state values.
– Check the machine for noise or vibrations on the bearings or bearing shields as it runs.
5. In case of uneven running or abnormal noise, switch off the machine. As the machine runs
down, identify the cause.
– If the mechanical operation improves immediately after the machine is switched off, then
the cause is magnetic or electrical.
– If the mechanical running does not improve immediately after switching the machine off,
then the cause is mechanical.
- Imbalance of the electrical machine or the driven machine
- The machine set has not been adequately aligned
- The machine is being operated at the system resonance point. System = motor, base
frame, foundation, ...

NOTICE
Serious damage to the machine
If the vibration values in operation are not maintained in accordance with DIN ISO
10816-3, then the machine can be mechanically destroyed.
● During operation, observe the vibration values in accordance with DIN ISO 10816‑3.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

92 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Commissioning
7.6 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperature (optional)

7.6 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperature (optional)

Prior to commissioning
If the machine is equipped with bearing thermometers, set the temperature value for
disconnection on the monitoring equipment before the first machine run.

Table 7-2 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperatures before commissioning

Set value Temperature

Alarm 115 °C
Shutting down 120 °C

Normal operation
Determine the maximum operating temperature of the bearings Toperation taking into account the
temperature, bearing load and influences of the plant on the motor in °C. Set the values for
shutdown and warning corresponding to the operating temperature Top.

Table 7-3 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperatures

Set value Temperature

Alarm Toperation + 5 K ≤ 115 °C
Shutting down Toperation + 10 K ≤ 120 °C

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 93
Commissioning
7.6 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperature (optional)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

94 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Operation 8
8.1 Safety instructions for operation
Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine:
● Comply with the general safety instructions.
● Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations.
● When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid
down in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment.

See also
Safety information (Page 15)

Risk of injury due to rotating parts

Rotating parts are dangerous. Touch protection against rotating parts is no longer guaranteed
if covers are removed. Touching rotating parts can result in death, serious injury or material
damage.
● Carefully ensure that all of the covers are closed while operational.
● First switch off and disconnect the machine if you must remove covers. Comply with the
"Five safety rules":
● Only remove the covers when the rotating parts have come to a complete standstill.

Danger as a result of stationary parts under voltage (live parts)

Live parts represent a hazard. Touch protection against active (live) parts is no longer
guaranteed if covers are removed. The minimum air and creepage distances may be fallen
below (violated) when coming close to active parts. Touching or coming close can result in
death, serious injury or material damage.
● Carefully ensure that all of the covers are closed while operational.
● First switch off and disconnect the machine if you must remove covers. Comply with the
"Five safety rules":
● When the machine is in operation, the terminal boxes must remain closed at all times.
Terminal boxes may be opened only when the machine is stopped and in a no-voltage
condition.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 95
Operation
8.1 Safety instructions for operation

Risk of burn injuries as a result of hot surfaces

Individual machine parts can become hot in operation. Burns can result when coming into
contact with these parts.
● Never touch machine parts during operation.
● Allow the machine to cool down before starting work.
● Check the temperature of parts before touching them. If required, wear suitable protective
equipment.

Faults in operation
Any changes with respect to the normal condition can indicate that the machine is not
functioning correctly.
● Higher power consumption, temperatures or vibration levels.
● Unusual noise or smells.
● Monitoring devices respond.
These changes can cause faults which can result in eventual or immediate death, serious injury
or material damage.
● Immediately inform the service personnel.
● If you are in doubt, immediately switch off the machine, carefully observing the system-
specific safety conditions.

Damage caused by condensation

Humidity in the air can condense for intermittent duty or load fluctuations. Condensate can
collect. Moisture can have a negative impact on the winding insulation or result in damage, such
as corrosion.
● Ensure that any condensation can freely flow away.

NOTICE
Non-periodic duty
In all of the operating modes, always operate the external fan according to DIN EN 60034-1.
For non-periodic operation, it is possible that the machine is thermally overloaded. This can
result in damage to the machine.
● In the case of extended non-operational periods, the fan should be in operation until the
machine has approximately reached the temperature of the coolant, see S2 duty type in
DIN EN 60034‑1.
● Use a suitable circuit to ensure that the external fan is appropriately operated.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

96 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Operation
8.2 Do not operate water-cooled motors without cooling water

NOTICE
EC fan control via an input signal
The fan motor can overheat if the external EC fan is operated at low fan speeds as a result of
the setpoint signal it receives.
● Monitor the motor using the integrated temperature sensors.
● Integrate the temperature monitoring into the interlocking circuit.

8.2 Do not operate water-cooled motors without cooling water

The motor must always be connected to the cooling water supply during operation.

NOTICE
Cooling water supply
If the cooling water supply fails or if the motor is operated for a short time without water cooling,
the motor will overheat. This can result in material damage or even a write-off.
Never operate the motor without the cooling water supply switched on. Monitor the
permissible water inlet temperatures.

WARNING
Risk of burning from hot steam
If the cooling water supply fails, the motor will overheat. If cooling water runs into the hot motor,
hot steam suddenly forms, which escapes under high pressure. The cooling water system can
burst. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Do not connect the cooling water supply until the motor has cooled down.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 97
Operation
8.3 Switching on the machine

8.3 Switching on the machine

● After starting the motor, observe it for a while to see if it is running smoothly and check the
monitoring devices.
● Monitor operation and the monitoring devices regularly and record the values you read off.

NOTICE
Speed monitoring
The motor is designed for a certain speed range.
If a motor is operated at impermissible speeds damage to the winding, bearings, or
complete destruction of the motor can be the result.
Ensure that the speeds specified on the rating plate are not exceeded by appropriately
configuring controller and speed monitoring components.

See also
Description (Page 21)

NOTICE
Excessive machine temperature
If the anti-condensation heating is operated while the machine is running, this can increase the
temperatures inside the machine. This can result in material damage.
● Make sure that the anti-condensation heating is switched off before the machine is
switched on.
● Only operate anti-condensation heating when the machine is switched off.

8.4 Switching off water-cooled motors

● Switch off the cooling water supply for longer non-operational periods.
● When switching-off, also observe the converter operating instructions.
● If anti-condensation heating is available, switch it on.

8.5 Switching off force-ventilated motors

● Switch off the external fan during longer standstill periods.
Leave the fan on for approximately 30 minutes after switching off the motor to avoid
overheating of the motor.
● Follow the operating instructions of the converter.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

98 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Operation
8.6 Switching on again after an emergency switching-off

8.6 Switching on again after an emergency switching-off

● Check the machine before recommissioning the driven machine after an Emergency Off.
● Eliminate all the causes that have led to the emergency off

8.7 Stoppages
The stoppage is a shutdown for a period of time, during which the machine is stopped but
remains at the location of use.
Under normal ambient conditions, e. g. the stopped machine is not exposed to any vibration, no
increased level of corrosion, etc. in general, the following measures are necessary during
stoppages.

Measures for machines ready to operate during longer non-operational periods

● For longer periods when the machine is not being used, either energize it at regular intervals
(roughly once a month), or at least spin the rotor.
● Please refer to the section"Switching on" (Page 91) before switching on to recommission the
motor.

NOTICE
Damage due to improper storage
The machine can be damaged if it is not stored properly. If the motor is out of service for
extended periods of time, implement suitable anti-corrosion, preservation, and drying
measures.
When recommissioning the motor after a long period out of service, carry out the measures
recommended in the chapter entitled "Commissioning (Page 87)".

8.7.1 Avoidance of damage to roller bearings during stoppages

Extended stoppages at the identical or almost identical resting position of the roller bearings
can lead to damage such as brinelling or corrosion, for example.
● During stoppages, regularly start the machine up for a brief period once a month. As a
minimum, rotate the rotor several times.
If you have uncoupled the machine from the driven machine and secured the rotor with a
rotor shipping brace, then remove this before turning the rotor over or starting the machine
up.
Make sure that the resting position of the roller bearings after the rotor has been turned over
is different from what it previously had been. Use the fitted key or the coupling halves as
reference markers.
● During re-commissioning, refer to the information in the "Commissioning" section.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 99
Operation
8.8 Decommissioning the machine

See also
Commissioning (Page 87)

8.8 Decommissioning the machine

NOTICE
Damage as a result of an extended period out of service
If the machine is going to be out of service for longer than six months, then take the necessary
measures for preservation and storing. Otherwise damage to the machine will result.

Record the decommissioning steps. This log will be useful upon recommissioning.

8.9 Re-commissioning the machine

When you re-commission the machine, proceed as follows:
● Study the record made when the machine was decommissioned, and reverse the measures
that were taken for conservation and storage.
● Perform the measures listed in the "Commissioning" section.

See also
Commissioning (Page 87)
Insulation resistance and polarization index (Page 50)

8.10 Faults

8.10.1 Inspections in the event of faults

Natural disasters or unusual operating conditions, such as overloading or short circuit, are
faults that overload the machine electrically or mechanically.
Immediately perform an inspection after such faults.
Correct the cause of the fault as described in the respective remedial measures section. Repair
any damage to the machine.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

100 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Operation
8.10 Faults

8.10.2 Electrical faults at force-ventilated motors

Note
When operating the machine with a converter, also refer to the operating instructions of the
frequency converter if electrical faults occur.

Table 8-1 Electrical faults

↓ Motor fails to start

↓ Motor accelerates sluggishly
↓ Humming noise when starting
↓ Humming noise in operation
↓ High temperature rise during no-load operation
↓ High temperature rise under load
↓ High temperature rise of individual winding sections
Possible causes of faults Remedial measures
X X X X Overload Reduce the load.
X Interruption of a phase in the Check frequency converters and supply cables.
supply cable
X X X X Interruption of a phase in the Check frequency converters and supply cables.
supply after switching on
X X X X Winding short circuit or phase Determine the winding and insulation resistances. Con‐
short circuit in stator winding tact the Service Center.
X Converter output voltage too Check the settings at the frequency converter and per‐
high, frequency too low form the automatic motor identification.
X External fan is not running Check the external fan and its connections.
X Wrong direction of rotation of the Check the electrical connections to the external fan.
external fan
X Reduced air intake Check the air ducts; clean the machine.

8.10.3 Electrical faults at water-cooled motors

Note
When operating the machine with a converter, also refer to the operating instructions of the
frequency converter if electrical faults occur.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 101
Operation
8.10 Faults

Table 8-2 Electrical faults

↓ Motor fails to start

↓ Motor accelerates sluggishly
↓ Humming noise when starting
↓ Humming noise in operation
↓ High temperature rise during no-load operation
↓ High temperature rise under load
↓ High temperature rise of individual winding sections
Possible causes of faults Remedial measures
X X X X Overload Reduce the load.
X Interruption of a phase in the feeder Check the frequency converters and feeder cables.
cable
X X X X Interruption of a phase in the feeder Check the frequency converters and feeder cables.
cable after switching on
X X X X Winding short circuit or interphase Determine the winding and insulation resistances.
short circuit in stator winding Contact the Service Center.
X Converter output voltage too high, Check the settings at the frequency converter and
frequency too low perform the automatic motor identification.
X X Cooling water not connected Check the cooling water connection. Switch on the
Cooling water supply switched off cooling water supply.
Water connection / pipes defective Find the leak and seal it. Contact the Service Center.
X X Cooling water flow rate too low Increase the cooling water flow rate.
Intake temperature too high Set the correct intake temperature.

8.10.4 Mechanical faults

The following table shows the possible causes of and remedial measures for mechanical faults.

Table 8-3 Mechanical faults

↓ Grinding noise
↓ Overheating
↓ Radial vibrations
↓ Axial vibrations
Possible causes of faults Remedial measures
X Rotating parts are grinding Establish the cause and realign the parts.
X Rotor not balanced Decouple the rotor and then rebalance it.
X Rotor out of true, shaft bent Contact the Service Center.
X X Poor alignment Align the machine set and check the coupling. 1)
X Coupled machine not balanced Rebalance the coupled machine.
X Shocks from coupled machine Examine the coupled machine.
X X Resonance of the overall system comprising mo‐ Reinforce the foundation after prior consultation with the
tor and foundation Service Center.
X X Changes in foundation Determine the cause of the changes and, if necessary,
rectify. Realign the machine.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

102 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Operation
8.10 Faults

↓ Grinding noise
↓ Overheating
↓ Radial vibrations
↓ Axial vibrations
Possible causes of faults Remedial measures
X Reduced air supply, direction of rotation of fan Check the air ducts; clean the machine.
possibly incorrect
X X Uneven gearbox operation Resolve any gearbox faults.
1)
Take into account possible changes which may occur during overheating.

8.10.5 Roller bearing faults

Damage to roller bearings can be difficult to detect in some cases. If in doubt, replace the
bearing. Use other bearing designs only after consulting the manufacturer.

Table 8-4 Roller bearing faults

↓ Bearing overheats
↓ Bearing "whistles"
↓ Bearing "knocks"
Possible causes of faults Remedial measures
X High coupling pressure Align the machine more accurately.
X Belt tension too high Reduce the drive belt tension.
X Bearing contaminated Clean or replace the bearing. Check the seals.
X High ambient temperature Use a suitable high-temperature grease.
X X Insufficient lubrication Grease the bearings as instructed.
X X Bearing canted Properly install the bearing.
X X Insufficient bearing play Contact the Service Center.
X Excessive bearing play Contact the Service Center.
X X Bearing corroded Replace the bearing. Check the seals.
X Too much grease in bearing Remove surplus grease.
X Wrong grease in the bearing Use the correct grease.
X Friction marks on raceway Replace the bearing.
X Brinelling or scoring Replace the bearing. Avoid any vibration at standstill

8.10.6 Holding brake faults

Information on holding brake faults can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions in
the (Page 169) appendix.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 103
Operation
8.10 Faults

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

104 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Maintenance 9
Through careful and regular maintenance, inspections, and overhauls you can detect faults at
an early stage and resolve them. This means that you can avoid consequential damage.
Operating conditions and characteristics can vary widely. For this reason, only general
maintenance intervals can be specified here. Maintenance intervals should therefore be
scheduled to suit the local conditions (dirt, starting frequency, load, etc.).
Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine:
● Comply with the general safety instructions (Page 15)
● Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations at the place of
installation
● When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid
down in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment.

Note
Please contact the service center (Page 161), if you require support with service, maintenance
or repair.

9.1 Observe the operating instructions of the components

When carrying out any maintenance and repair work, always carefully observe the
manufacturer's operating instructions for additional components.

See also
Operating instructions, holding brake (Page 169)
Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180 (Page 249)
Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK225 (Page 263)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 105
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

9.2 Inspection and maintenance

9.2.1 Safety instructions for inspection and maintenance

Danger as a result of stationary parts under voltage (live parts)

Live parts represent a hazard. Touch protection against active (live) parts is no longer
guaranteed if covers are removed. The minimum air and creepage distances may be fallen
below (violated) when coming close to active parts. Touching or coming close can result in
death, serious injury or material damage.
● Take the machine out of operation.
● Switch off the machine and ensure that it is in a no-voltage condition. Carefully comply with
the "5 safety rules".
● Only open the terminal box when the motor is stationary and in a no voltage condition.

Risk of injury due to rotating parts

Rotating parts are dangerous. Touch protection against rotating parts is no longer guaranteed
if covers are removed. Touching rotating parts can result in death, serious injury or material
damage.
● Before carrying out any repair work on the machine, take it out of operation, and carefully
lock it out so that it cannot be switched on again.
● Only remove the covers when the rotating parts have come to a complete standstill.

Risk of burn injuries due to hot surfaces

In operation, the temperature of individual machine parts can increase - and only decrease
slowly after switching off. You can burn yourself if you touch hot surfaces.
● Allow the machine to cool before starting any maintenance and service work on the machine.
● Check the temperature of parts before touching them. If required, wear suitable protective
equipment.

Damage if the machine is not maintained

The machine can be damaged if it is not appropriately maintained. This can cause faults which
can result in eventual or immediate death, serious injury or material damage.
● Maintain the machine at the specified maintenance intervals.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

106 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

Damage from foreign bodies in the machine

Foreign bodies such as dirt, tools or loose components can be left by accident inside the
machine after maintenance is performed. These can cause short circuits, reduce the
performance of the cooling system or increase noise in operation. They can also damage the
motor.
● Ensure that no foreign bodies are left in or on the motor.
● Securely attach all loose parts once you have completed the work.
● Carefully remove any dirt.

9.2.2 Inspections in the event of faults

Natural disasters or unusual operating conditions, such as overloading or short circuit, are
faults that overload the machine electrically or mechanically.
Immediately perform an inspection after such faults.

9.2.3 Initial inspection

Perform the following checks after approximately 500 operating hours or at the latest after six
months:

Table 9-1 Checks after installation or repair

Check When the At stand‐

motor is still
running
The electrical parameters are maintained. X
The smooth running characteristics and machine running noise have not X
deteriorated.
The motor foundation has no cracks and indentations. (*) X X

(*) You can perform these checks while the motor is running or at a standstill.
Additional checks may also be required according to the system-specific conditions.

NOTICE
If you detect any deviations during the inspection, you must rectify them immediately. They
may otherwise damage the motor.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 107
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

9.2.4 Main inspection

Table 9-2 Checks that must be performed during the main inspection

Checking When the At stand‐

motor is still
running
The stated electrical characteristics are being observed X
The smooth running characteristics and machine running noise have not X
deteriorated
The foundation has no cracks or indentations. (*) X X
The motor is aligned within the permissible tolerance range.
All the fixing bolts/screws for the mechanical and electrical connections have X
been securely tightened
The winding insulation resistances are sufficiently high. X
Any bearing insulation has been fitted as shown on plates and labeling. X
Cables and insulating parts and components are in good condition and there X
is no evidence of discoloring
Condensation can freely flow away. X

(*) You can perform these checks while the motor is running or at a standstill.

NOTICE
Deviations from the normal state
If you detect any defects or malfunctions during the inspection, you must rectify them
immediately. They may otherwise cause damage to the machine.

See also
Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index (Page 51)

9.2.5 Regreasing intervals

NOTICE
Damage to roller bearings
The regreasing intervals for roller bearings are different from the servicing intervals for the
machine. Failure to regrease the rolling-contact bearings at the specified intervals can result
in them sustaining damage.
● Comply with the regreasing intervals for roller bearings. The regreasing intervals are
specified on the lubricant plate.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

108 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

9.2.6 Changing bearings when using permanently lubricated rolling-contact bearings

The replacement of the permanently lubricated roller bearing is determined by the number of
operating hours and is required around every three years.

9.2.7 Maintenance

When carrying out any work on the machine, observe the general safety instructions (Page 15)
and the specifications contained in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical
equipment.

9.2.7.1 Measuring the insulation resistance during the course of maintenance work
Measuring the insulation resistance and polarization index (PI) provides information on the
condition of the machine. It is therefore important to check the insulation resistance and the
polarization index at the following times:
● Before starting up a machine for the first time
● After an extended period in storage or downtime
● Within the scope of maintenance work
The following information is provided regarding the state of the winding insulation:
● Is the winding head insulation conductively contaminated?
● Has the winding insulation absorbed moisture?
As such, you can determine whether the machine needs commissioning or any necessary
measures such as cleaning and/or drying the winding:
● Can the machine be put into operation?
● Must the windings be cleaned or dried?
Detailed information on testing and the limit values can be found here:
"Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index" (Page 51)

9.2.7.2 Maintenance intervals

Perform the following maintenance measures after the operating time or the intervals specified
in the following table elapse.

Table 9-3 Maintenance measures

Maintenance measures Maintenance intervals

Initial inspection After 500 operating hours, at the latest after six months
Regreasing See the lubricant plate
Permanent lubrication (with coupling Replace bearings after approximately 20,000 operating hours,
output) at the latest after three years

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 109
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

Maintenance measures Maintenance intervals

Cleaning Depending on the degree of pollution
Main inspection After approximately 16,000 operating hours, at the latest after
two years

9.2.7.3 Rolling-contact bearings

The motors have rolling-contact bearing bushes for grease lubrication. Depending on the
version, the motors are permanently lubricated or are equipped with a regreasing device.
Depending on the type of load, a deep-groove ball bearing or a cylindrical-roller bearing is fitted
as a floating bearing on the drive end.
The DE bearing contains built-in compression springs that help to rebalance the axial play of
the external bearing rings.

See also
Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning (Page 89)

9.2.7.4 Lubrication
The specified grease data apply for the data specified on the rating plate data and for high-
quality grease in accordance with the specifications in these operating instructions. These
greases significantly exceed the requirements according to DIN 51825 and ISO 6743‑9,
therefore permitting the specified relubrication intervals.

Initial lubrication
The following greases are used for initial lubrication of the bearings in the factory.
● Standard version: ESSO / Unirex N3
● "Performance" version: Lubcon / Sintono GPE702

Grease selection criteria

The following greases are permissible for standard applications without any special
requirements:
● High quality ISO‑L‑X BDEA3 greases according to ISO 6743-9
● K3N‑20 greases according to DIN 51825 with lithium soap as thickener and an upper
service temperature of at least +140 °C / +284 °F.
When selecting the lubricating grease, ensure that the technical data of the grease is suitable
for the application.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

110 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

The lubricating grease must satisfy the criteria listed in the table below and must match the
operating conditions. If different special lubricating greases are stated on the lubricant plate,
then different criteria apply.

Table 9-4 Criteria for selecting roller bearing greases

Criteria Standard Property, characteristic value Unit

Type of base oil - Mineral oil -
Thickener - Lithium -
Consistency according to NLGI class DIN 51818 ● 3 for vertical and horizontal types of construction -
● 2 alternatively for horizontal type of construction
with reduced lubrication interval
Worked penetration DIN ISO 2137 220–295 0.1 mm
Operating temperature range - At least -20 °C ... +140 °C °C
Dropping point DIN ISO 2176 At least +200 °C °C
Basic oil viscosity DIN 51562-1 ● Approx. 100 mm²/s at 40° C mm²/s
● Approx. 10 mm²/s at 100 °C
Additive - ● Antioxidation (AO), Anti-Wear (AW) -
● No solid lubricants
● Alternatively: Extreme-Pressure (EP) only after
consultation with grease and bearing
manufacturers
FE9 test: A/1500/6000 DIN 51821-1/-2 F10 ≥ 50 h at +140 °C h
F50 ≥ 100 h at +140 °C
Behavior with respect to water DIN 51807 0 or 1 at a test temperature of +90 °C -
Corrosive effect on copper DIN 51811 0 or 1 at a test temperature of +140 °C Corr.°
Resistance to corrosion (EMCOR) DIN 51802 / 0 - 0 (0 - 1, permissible for special greases) Corr.°
ISO 11007
Solid matter content, particle sizes DIN 51813 < 10 mg/kg mg/kg
> 25 μm
Suitability of bearings - Suitable for the built-in motor bearings, seals and -
Speed characteristic value nxdm these speeds mm/min

NOTICE
Other ambient temperatures and operating conditions
For other ambient temperatures and operating conditions, an alternative grease to the one
stated on the lubricant plate may only be used after prior consultation with the manufacturer.
Otherwise the roller bearing could be damaged.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 111
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

NOTICE
Use of other greases
If other greases are used, compatibility with the overall system cannot be guaranteed.
Otherwise the roller bearing could be damaged.
If you use greases that satisfy only the minimum requirements of DIN 51825 or ISO 6743-9,
then reduce the lubrication intervals by half or appropriately adapt them. If in doubt, consult the
manufacturer.

Recommended greases for roller bearings

For standard applications, the following high-quality greases are recommended for roller
bearings for vertical and horizontal motor types of construction due to their technical attributes:

Table 9-5 Roller bearing greases for vertical and horizontal types of construction

Manufacturer Grease type

ExxonMobil Unirex N3
Esso
Fuchs Renolit H443 HD88
Lubcon Turmoplex 3
FAG Arcanol Multi 3

For motors with a horizontal type of construction, you can alternatively use greases with NLGI
Class 2. However, the lubrication interval is reduced by 20 %.

Table 9-6 Alternative greases with NLGI Class 2 for motors with a horizontal type of construction

Manufacturer Grease type

ExxonMobil Unirex N2
Esso
Castrol Longtime PD2
Lubcon Turmogrease L 802 EP plus
Shell Retinax LX2
FAG Arcanol Multi 2

For the "Performance" version, only use these special greases. The Performance version is not
available for explosion-protected motors.

Table 9-7 Grease for the "Performance" version

Manufacturer Grease type

Lubcon Sintono GPE702

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

112 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

NOTICE
Damage caused by mixing lubrication types
Mixing different greases adversely affects the lubricating properties. Only the manufacturer
provides a guarantee as to whether certain greases can be mixed.
● Never mix different greases.

Regreasing
Regreasing data are stamped on the lubricant plate of the machine:
● Relubrication intervals in operating hours
● Regreasing amount in grams
● Grease type
Regrease the bearing at the latest every 12 months irrespective of the actual number of
operating hours.

NOTICE
Relubrication intervals
The relubrication intervals for roller bearings are different from the servicing intervals for the
machine. The roller bearings may be damaged if the relubrication intervals are not complied
with.
● Pay attention to the instructions on the lubricant plate.

Grease replacement intervals

The grease replacement intervals in these operating instructions or the relubrication intervals
indicated on the plate apply for the following conditions:
● Normal load
● Operation at speeds in accordance with the rating plate
● Low-vibration operation
● Neutral ambient air
● High-quality roller bearing greases
In the case of unfavorable conditions, reduce the relubrication intervals after prior consultation
with the manufacturer.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 113
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

Regreasing
While regreasing, the shaft must rotate so that the new grease is evenly distributed throughout
the bearing. For motors that are be operated with a converter, regreasing should be carried out
at low-to-medium speeds (nmin = 250 rpm, nmax = 3600 rpm) to ensure an even distribution of
grease. This ensures adequate even lubrication.

WARNING
Rotating parts
When regreasing, pay attention to all rotating components. This can result in death, serious
injury or material damage.

1. Clean the grease nipple before regreasing. Gradually press in an appropriate type and
amount of grease, as stamped on the lubricant plate and specified in these operating
instructions.
The roller bearing temperature initially increases noticeably. After the excess grease has
been displaced out of the bearing, the temperature will return to the normal value.
The used grease collects outside each bearing in a spent grease chamber.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

114 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

Lubricating using the regreasing system

A flat grease nipple in accordance with DIN 3404, size M10x1, is provided at both the DE ① and
the NDE ② for regreasing.
1. Clean the grease nipples at the DE and NDE.
2. Press in the type and quantity of grease specified (see lubrication instruction plate). The
shaft rotates so that the new grease is evenly distributed throughout the bearing.
The bearing temperature initially increases noticeably. After the excess grease has been
displaced out of the bearing, the temperature will return to the normal value.

Figure 9-1 Flat grease nipples ① and ②, schematic representation for types 1PH818. and
1PH822.




Figure 9-2 Flat grease nipple ① and ② (schematic representation for type 1PH828.)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 115
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

9.2.7.5 Cleaning the spent grease chamber

The rolling-contact bearing's spent grease chamber only has room for a limited amount of spent
grease. When the spent grease chamber is full, the spent grease must be removed, otherwise
it will penetrate into the interior of the machine. The information on the amount of grease to be
used when regreasing can be found on the lubricant plate. When changing the bearings
remove the spent grease that has collected in the spent grease chamber and in the outer
bearing cover.
To remove the spent grease, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the transmission element.
2. Remove the spent grease:
– At the DE, unscrew the outer bearing cover and empty the spent grease from the outer
bearing cover.
– At the NDE, remove the cover of the speed sensor and the cover of the spent grease
chamber. Empty the spent grease chamber.
Note
For types 1PH818. and 1PH822., you must remove the fan before removing the speed
encoder cover. At the NDE, remove the fan and then the speed encoder cover.

9.2.7.6 Maintaining the cooling water system

The cooling water pipe system, made of high-grade steel, is maintenance-free if the required
coooling water quality (Page 29) is maintained.

9.2.7.7 Servicing the external fan

● Check the external fan every 12 months for mechanical vibration as specified in DIN ISO
10816. The maximum permissible vibrational severity is 2.8 mm/s measured at the fan
housing.
● Regularly clean and inspect the fan. Impeller and frame are subject to natural wear
depending on the area of application and displacement medium.

WARNING
Impeller can crack
Due to deposits and the resulting imbalance there is a hazard of fatigue fracture of the
impeller. The impeller can crack in operation. Death, serious injury, or material damage
can result.
● Regularly clean and inspect the fan.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

116 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

WARNING
Voltages at the internal motor connections
The motor may continue running, e.g. due to airflow, or may run on after being shut down. This
means that dangerous voltages of over 50 V can occur at the internal motor connections.
Death, serious injury, or material damage can result.
● For safety reasons, it is not permissible to make any unauthorized modifications or
changes to the fan.
● The external fan can automatically switch on and switch off as a result of its inherent
function.
● After a power failure or when the power has been disconnected, the external fan starts up
automatically again when the voltage is restored.
● Wait until the external fan has come to a standstill before approaching it.
● Provide a protective circuit that prevents the main motor from being switched on when the
external fan is not in operation.

Clean the external fan

WARNING
Danger of shearing
Death, severe injury and material damage can occur if you come into contact with the rotating
fan impeller.
● The fan impeller must be stationary when carrying out any work on the external cooling
system.
● Interrupt/disconnect the external cooling unit circuit.
● Lock out the circuit so that it cannot be switched on again.

NOTICE
Applying force
If excessive forces are present, this can damage the fan impeller.

● Use a suitable cloth or brush to clean the external fan, ensuring that moisture does not enter
the motor.
● Once the voltage has been disconnected on all poles, wait for five minutes before touching
the device.
● Never open the external cooling unit during operation.
● Never loosen any fixing screws for the external cooling unit during operation.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 117
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance

Changing the filter mat of the external fan (option)

Check the state of the filter mat regularly depending on the prevailing conditions. Change it if
it is dirty.

CAUTION
Changing the filter only when the fan is stationary
When the mesh is removed, the degree of protection is no longer guaranteed. There is a risk
of injury. Only change the filter when the fan is stationary.

1. Unscrew the fan guard and remove the old filter mat.
2. Insert the new filter mats and screw the fan guard back into position.
You can order the filter mat as a spare part.
● Spare parts, external fan (Page 145)
● Spare parts kits (Page 133)
● Ordering spare parts via the Internet (Page 134)

9.2.7.8 Maintaining terminal boxes

Requirement
The machine is de-energized.

Checking the terminal box

● Terminal boxes must be regularly checked for tightness, undamaged insulation, and tight
terminal connections.
● If dust or humidity have infiltrated the terminal box, this should be cleaned and dried
(particularly the insulators).
Check all the seals and sealing surfaces and address the cause of the leakiness.
● Check the insulators, connectors and cable connections in the terminal box.
● Replace the damaged components if necessary.

WARNING
Short-circuit hazard
Damaged components can cause short circuits, possibly resulting in death, serious injuries
and property damage.
Replace damaged components.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

118 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.3 Repair

9.3 Repair
Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine:
● Comply with the general safety instructions.
● Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations.
● When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid
down in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment.

See also
Safety information (Page 15)

Note
If the motor has to be transported, please observe the information and instructions in
the "Transport" (Page 36) section.

9.3.1 Prepare servicing work

● The drawings and parts lists do not contain any detailed information about the type and
dimensions of fixing elements and components. For this reason, you should establish this
information when dismantling them and make a note of it for the purpose of reassembly.
● Document the type, dimensions and arrangement of the parts so that you will be able to
reassemble the machine to its original state.
● Use suitable tools to disassemble the machine.
● Take measures to prevent parts from dropping down before you dismantle them, e.g. by
replacing fastening elements with extra-long screws, threaded bolts or similar. This ensures
that the part is supported after it is pulled off.
● The centerings in the shaft extensions have reset threads. Use lifting gear which is suitable
for the rotor weight and direction of loading.

WARNING
Rotor can fall down
Eyebolts in accordance with DIN 580 are unsuitable for suspending the rotor. The rotor can fall
off. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Use lifting gear which is suitable for the rotor weight and direction of loading.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 119
Maintenance
9.3 Repair

WARNING
Machine damage caused by improper repair work
Improper servicing work can damage the machine. This can cause damages and/or faults
which can result in eventual or immediate death, serious injury, or property damage.
● Properly assemble or disassemble the machine.
● Use only suitable tools and equipment.
● Immediately replace damaged components.
● Contact the Service Center (Page 161), if necessary.

9.3.2 Screws with preCOTE coating

The motor can partly be fitted with screws with preCOTE coating. To ensure screw locking, use
new screws with preCOTE coating during assembly/repair. As an alternative, use normal
screws with a threadlocker such as Loctite.

9.3.3 Disassembling a water-cooled motor

The drawings and parts lists do not contain any detailed information about the type and
dimensions of fixing elements, etc.

NOTICE
Removing centered parts
Centered parts can be damaged if removed improperly with unsuitable tools.
Use pullers or suitable devices to remove parts and components attached to the motor shaft.

Disassembly
1. Unscrew the water pipes.
2. Ensure you do not damage insulation when dismantling the device. Check the insulation for
possible damage prior to re-installing.
3. To disassemble the motor, disconnect the connecting cables from the terminals and the
entry plate from the terminal box housing.
In this way, the respective positioning of the cables in relation to one another and the sealing
of the cables in the cable entries are maintained to a large extent.
4. Remove the cable at the outer grounding terminal
5. Pull out the connector of the speed sensor.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

120 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.3 Repair

Links
The circuit diagram (Page 69) shows the relationships required when connecting to the line
supply.

Component assignment
When dismantling or assembling the bearing pay attention to the proper arrangement of the
components particularly if the bearing is the same size on the DE side and NDE side, for
example:
● Bearing shield
● Bearings
● Corrugated springs
● Covers with different centering length, etc.

See also
Service and Support (Page 161)

9.3.4 Dissembling a force-ventilated motor

The drawings and parts lists do not contain any detailed information about the type and
dimensions of fixing elements, etc.

NOTICE
Removing centered parts
Centered parts can be damaged if removed improperly with unsuitable tools.
Use pullers or suitable devices to remove parts and components attached to the motor shaft.

Disassembly
1. Ensure you do not damage insulation when dismantling the device. Check the insulation for
possible damage prior to re-installing.
2. To disassemble the motor, disconnect the connecting cables from the terminals and the
entry plate from the terminal box housing.
In this way, the respective positioning of the cables in relation to one another and the sealing
of the cables in the cable entries are maintained to a large extent.
3. Remove the connecting cables in the terminal box of the fan motor, and if necessary the
cable on the ground terminal and the cables laid out on the motor.
4. Pull out the connector of the speed sensor.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 121
Maintenance
9.3 Repair

Links
The circuit diagram (Page 69) shows the relationships required when connecting to the line
supply.

Component assignment
When dismantling or assembling the bearing pay attention to the proper arrangement of the
components particularly if the bearing is the same size on the DE side and NDE side, for
example:
● Bearing shield
● Bearings
● Compression springs
● Spacer washers,
● Covers with different centering length, etc.

See also
Service and Support (Page 161)
If roller-contact bearings with an insulated design are installed, use roller bearings of the same
type as spare parts. This will prevent any bearing damage being caused by bearing currents.

9.3.5 Removing and installing the protecting ring

The protecting ring acts as an outer bearing seal. It sits on the shaft outside the bearing end
shield.

Disassembly
● Once the coupling is detached, you can remove the protective ring from the shaft. After it has
been removed, the protective ring will be deformed and must be replaced.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

122 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.3 Repair

Assembly
● Push the protecting ring over the end of the shaft.
● For 1PH818. or 1PH822. motors, ensure that the outer collar is placed with a space of 1 mm
from the bearing end shield (detail Z).

ཱ
= PP

Figure 9-3 Fitting the protecting ring

9.3.6 Removing and mounting the bearing shields

1. Unscrew the belt pulleys. The belt pulleys may be jammed or distorted, in which case you
should lever them off carefully.
2. Remove the bearing shield.
– When removing the bearing shields, take care that the windings are not damaged.
– For water-cooled motors, also ensure that the cooling water pipes are not damaged.
For assembly, proceed in reverse order.

WARNING
Lifting using the cooling water pipes
The cooling water pipe system has not been designed so that it can be used to lift the motor.
The machine can fall when lifted. Death, serious injury, or material damage will result.
● Only use the eyebolts on the bearing shields to transport and lift the motor.

9.3.7 Installing and sealing the motor

Strictly ensure the greatest possible care and cleanliness when repairing the machine.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 123
Maintenance
9.3 Repair

Mount the machine on an alignment plate. This ensures that the contact surfaces of the motor
feet are all on the same level.

NOTICE
Do not damage windings
Windings protrude from the stator housing and can be damaged when attaching the end
shield. This can damage the motor.
When mounting the end shield, ensure that the windings that project from the stator housing
are not damaged.

Sealing the machine (types 1PH818. and 1PH8225.)

● Clean bare joints between parts before re-assembling (e.g. between enclosures, end
shields and the active parts of bearings).
● Brush the bare joints with the non-hardening sealing agent "Hylomar M".
● Note that these joints between parts (e.g. the sealing gap on the active part of the bearing)
must also be resealed with a suitable, silicone-free sealant during assembly.
● Check the sealing elements fitted (e.g. at the terminal boxes) and replace them if they do not
provide an adequate seal.
● Follow the manufacturer's application and safety instructions when using the sealant.
● Replace parts that are subject to wear such as the adjusting springs.

Installing the bearing inserts

1. First position the parts that must be arranged on the shaft within the bearing.
2. To fit the bearings on the shaft, heat them up to about 80 °C in oil or air.
3. Then push the bearings onto the shaft up to its shoulder. Avoid any heavy blows that might
damage the bearings.
4. Fill the bearing to the top with the specified lubricating grease (Page 110).

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

124 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.3 Repair

9.3.8 Sealing the motor (type 1PH828.)

1. When assembling, seal the joints between parts, such as the sealing gap between the
enclosure and bearing shield, using suitable, silicon-free sealing compound.
2. Use joint sealant due to the higher requirements for degree of protection IP55.
Seal the joint ② using a non-hardening sealant, which remains permanently plastic, before
screwing on the bearing shields, for example "Hylomar M".
3. Check all the sealing elements, for example on the terminal box, for elasticity, aging or
damage. Replace any sealing elements if they are no longer fully effective.

ໂ
ໃ

① End shields ③ Housing

② Sealing gap ④ Protective tube
Figure 9-4 Sealing gap between the enclosure and bearing shields (schematic representation)

Installing the active parts of the bearings

● When installing/replacing the bearing, ensure that an insulated bearing is again installed at
the NDE.
● If radial shaft seals without helical springs are installed, also install the replacement part
without a spring.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 125
Maintenance
9.3 Repair

Sealing the bearings

The outer bearing seal comprises a rotary shaft seal.
● When installing the bearings, make sure that the seat of the shaft is not greased.
● The correct axial position of the rotary shaft seal is achieved when the outer edges of the
bearing cap end face ① and rotary shaft seal ② are flush.
཰

① Bearing cap end face

② Rotary shaft seal
③ Seat of shaft
Figure 9-5 Installing the rotary shaft seal

See also
Installing and sealing the motor (Page 123)

9.3.9 Relocating the external fan (type 1PH828.)

Subsequently moving the external fan from NDE to DE or vice versa must only be carried out
by qualified personnel or a Siemens Service Center (Page 161).

9.3.10 Removing and mounting the external fan

WARNING
Live parts
Contact with live parts can cause death, serious injury or material damage.
1. Before carrying out any maintenance work on the device, disconnect it from the line supply,
particularly before opening the terminal box.
2. Make sure that the device cannot be switched back on.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

126 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.3 Repair

Removing and mounting the external fan

1. Before carrying out any maintenance work on the device, disconnect it from the line supply.
2. Unscrew the screws ① and remove the external fan.
3. For mounting, proceed in reverse order.

Figure 9-6 Unscrewing the external fan (1PH818., 1PH822.)




Figure 9-7 Unscrewing the external fan (1PH828.)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 127
Maintenance
9.3 Repair

9.3.11 Removing and mounting the speed sensor

NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic modules contain components that can be seriously damaged by electrostatic
discharge. These modules can easily be destroyed unless they are handled properly.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given in the section
headed "Electrostatic Sensitive Devices" (Page 18).

Preparation
For 1PH818. and 1PH822. motors, the speed encoder can only be removed and replaced if
the external fan (Page 126) has been removed.

① Shaft ③ Speed encoder

② Torque arm ④ Encoder cover
Figure 9-8 Detailed view of the speed encoder

1. Unscrew the cover of the speed encoder.

2. Detach the electrical connection.
– Pull the cable carefully out of its holder.
– Pull out the connector.
3. Remove the screwed union connections for the speed encoder from the bearing shield.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

128 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.3 Repair

Separating the speed encoder

The following options are available for the purpose of separating the speed encoder from the
shaft by means of a clamping screw:

Disassembling the speed encoder - Version A

0[

཰ 0[
ཱ
0[

1. Remove screw M5x50 (①).

2. Screw in screw M5x10 and screw M6x70 one after the other. This releases the encoder
cone in the motor shaft (②).
3. Remove the speed encoder.

Removing the speed encoder - version B

཰
ཱ
FDrr

0

1. Loosen the retaining screw (①).

2. Press screw M10 onto the original screw. This will then drop out (②).
3. Remove the speed encoder.

Mounting the speed encoder

1. Screw the torque arm to the speed encoder, tightening the two screws by hand.
2. Use the M5x50 screw to secure the speed encoder over the internal cone, ensuring a
tightening torque of 5 Nm at the shaft extension.
3. Attach the torque arm to the bearing cover with a tightening torque of 3 Nm.
4. Loosen the screws of the torque arm so as to relieve the stress and tighten them crosswise,
with a tightening torque of 0.6 Nm.
5. Establish the electrical connection.
6. Screw on the cover of the speed encoder.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 129
Maintenance
9.3 Repair

9.3.12 Connecting the speed encoder

NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic modules contain components that can be seriously damaged by electrostatic
discharge. These modules can easily be destroyed unless they are handled properly.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given in the section
headed "Electrostatic Sensitive Devices" (Page 18).

1. Insert the connector into the socket.

2. Press the cable into the holder provided for it.
3. Screw on the sensor cover. Take care that you do not catch the cable as you screw it in.

཰ ཰

ི
Figure 9-9 Electrical connection of the speed sensor

9.3.13 Replacing the DRIVE-CLiQ interface (encoder module)

Only trained Siemens service engineers (Page 161) are authorized to replace the DRIVE-CLiQ
interface (sensor module).

NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic modules contain components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
These modules can be easily destroyed by improper handling.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given in the chapter ESD
Guidelines (Page 18).

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

130 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Maintenance
9.3 Repair

WARNING
Motor-specific sensor module
The Sensor Module contains motor-specific and sensor-specific data and an electronic
nameplate.
If you operate a different Sensor Module on the motor, this can result in serious injury or death,
or cause considerable material damage.
Only operate the sensor module on the original motor. Do not install the sensor module on
other motors. Do not replace the sensor module with a sensor module from a different motor.

9.3.14 Touch up any damaged paintwork

If the paint is damaged, it must be repaired in order to protect the unit against corrosion.

Note
Paint system
Contact the Service Center (Page 161) before you repair any paint damage. They will provide
you with more information about the correct paint system and methods of repairing paint
damage.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 131
Maintenance
9.3 Repair

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

132 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Spare parts 10
10.1 Ordering data
When ordering spare parts, in addition to the precise designation of the spare part, specify the
motor type and the serial number of the motor. Ensure that the spare part designation matches
the designation in the spare part lists and add the associated part number.

Example:

Spare part Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing (Part 3.00)

Machine type 1PH81841JD202FA1
Serial number N-W91246206010001
The machine type and the serial number are indicated on the rating plate and in the technical
data, and are also embossed on the drive end of the shaft.

Note
Bar code on rating plate
You can also read the machine type and serial number from the bar code on the rating plate.

Note
The graphics in this chapter are schematic representations of the basic versions. They are used
for spare parts definitions. The supplied version may differ in details from these representations.

10.2 Spare parts kits

The spare parts are bundled with the necessary wearing parts in a logical way so as to create
spare parts kits.
The following spare parts kits are available for you to order:

3.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bearing (complete)

4.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing (complete)
32.00 Spare parts kit, external fan (only force-ventilated motors)
55.00 Spare parts kit, relevant version of speed encoder
Additional spare parts are available on request.

See also
Service and Support (Page 161)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 133
Spare parts
10.3 Holding brake

Note
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
If you order a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, please specify when ordering from Spares on Web that
the DRIVE-CLiQ interface must be described along with the motor data.

10.3 Holding brake

Contact your Service Center for spare parts for the holding brake.

See also
Operating instructions, holding brake (Page 169)

Rolling bearings
When ordering rolling bearings, in addition to the bearing identification code, the
supplementary specifying code is also necessary for the bearing version. Both of these codes
are stamped on the lubricant plate and specified in the motor documentation, or can also be
taken from the installed bearings.
Always replace the rolling bearings with the identical bearings.
If insulated rolling bearings are fitted, use insulated rolling bearings of the same type as spare
parts. This will prevent any bearing damage being caused by bearing currents.

10.4 Ordering spare parts via the Internet

You can use "Spares on Web" to determine the order numbers for motor
spare parts quickly and easily.
.

See also
Spares on Web (https://www.sow.siemens.com/)
Guide for Spares on Web (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/news/en/25248626)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

134 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Spare parts
10.5 Anti-condensation heating

10.5 Anti-condensation heating

The anti-condensation heater is mounted directly on the winding. The anti-condensation heater
cannot be removed without causing damage to the winding. A new anti-condensation heater
may only be installed by Siemens Service Center (Page 161) specialists.

10.6 Water-cooled motor

10.6.1 Water-cooled motor, complete


















Figure 10-1 Schematic diagram of motor (complete)

Table 10-1 Motor, complete

Number Designation Number Designation

3.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bearing 8.00* Rotor, complete
4.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 10.00* Stator housing (with laminated core,
winding and cooling water pipe system)
55.00 Spare parts kit, speed encoder 10.35* Hoisting lug
5.00* Bearing shield, drive end 20.00* Terminal box
6.00* Bearing shield, non-drive end 99.00* Special built-on parts

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 135
Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor

10.6.2 Roller bearing cartridge DE with radial shaft sealing ring with regreasing














Figure 10-2 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing

Table 10-2 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with
regreasing

Number Designation Number Designation

3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 3.60* Inner bearing cover
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(floating bearing)
● Radial shaft sealing ring
● Inner ring
3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple
3.45* Corrugated spring/compression
springs

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

136 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor

10.6.3 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, belt coupling











Figure 10-3 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing

Table 10-3 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing

Number Designation Number Designation

3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 3.60* Inner bearing cover
● Cylindrical-roller bearing (floating
bearing)
● Protecting ring (rotating)
3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 137
Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor

10.6.4 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, coupling output, with regreasing












Figure 10-4 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing

Table 10-4 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing

Number Designation Number Designation

3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 3.60* Inner bearing cover
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(floating bearing)
● Protecting ring (rotating)
3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple
3.45* Corrugated spring

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

138 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor

10.6.5 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, coupling output, with permanent
lubrication






Figure 10-5 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication

Table 10-5 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent
lubrication

Number Designation
3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing (floating bearing)
● Protecting ring (rotating)
3.45* Corrugated spring/compression springs

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 139
Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor

10.6.6 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, with permanent lubrication







Figure 10-6 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, permanent lubrication

Table 10-6 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, permanent lubrication

Number Designation
4.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing (locating bearing)
● Retaining ring
4.60* Inner bearing cover

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

140 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor

10.6.7 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)









Figure 10-7 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)

Table 10-7 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)

Number Designation Number Designation

4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing 4.80* Grease nipple
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(locating bearing)
● Retaining ring
4.60* Inner bearing cover 4.90* Cover of spent grease chamber

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 141
Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor

10.6.8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)











Figure 10-8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)

Table 10-8 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)

Number Designation Number Designation

4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing 4.80* Grease nipple
● Deep-groove ball bearing 4.60* Inner bearing cover
(locating bearing)
● Retaining ring

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

142 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor

10.6.9 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end "Performance"










Figure 10-9 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing

Table 10-9 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing

Number Designation Number Designation

4.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bear‐ 4.80* Grease nipple
ing
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(locating bearing)
● Shrink ring
4.60* Inner bearing cover 4.90* Cover of spent grease chamber

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 143
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor

10.7 Force-ventilated motor

10.7.1 Force-ventilated motor, complete

  












Figure 10-10 Schematic representation of the motor, complete

Table 10-10 Motor, complete

Number Designation Number Designation

3.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing 10.00* Stator housing (with laminated core
and winding)
4.00 Spare parts kit, DE bearing 10.35* Eyebolt
5.00* Bearing shield, DE 20.00* Terminal box
6.00* Bearing shield, NDE 32.00 External fan
8.00* Rotor, complete 55.10 Spare parts kit, speed encoder

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

144 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor

10.7.2 External fan









Figure 10-11 Spare parts for external fan (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)

Table 10-11 Spare parts for external fan

Part Description Part Description

32.00 Fan 34.31 External grill cover
34.21 Filter element * 34.33 Inside basket

* Option for type 1PH828.

10.7.3 External fan (option L75)

The external fan for option L75 can only be ordered as a part. Contact the Service Center, if
necessary.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 145
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor

10.7.4 Roller bearing cartridge DE with radial shaft sealing ring with regreasing













Figure 10-12 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing

Table 10-12 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with
regreasing

Number Designation Number Designation

3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 3.60* Inner bearing cover
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(floating bearing)
● Radial shaft sealing ring
● Inner ring
3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple
3.45* Corrugated spring/compression
springs

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

146 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor

10.7.5 Roller bearing cartridge DE, belt coupling










Figure 10-13 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing

Table 10-13 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing

Number Designation Number Designation

3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 3.60* Inner bearing cover
● Cylindrical-roller bearing (floating
bearing)
● Protecting ring (rotating)
3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 147
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor

10.7.6 Roller bearing cartridge DE, coupling output, with regreasing












Figure 10-14 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing

Table 10-14 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing

Number Designation Number Designation

3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 3.60* Inner bearing cover
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(floating bearing)
● Protecting ring (rotating)
3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple
3.45* Corrugated spring

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

148 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor

10.7.7 Roller bearing cartridge DE, coupling output, with permanent lubrication







Figure 10-15 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication

Table 10-15 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent
lubrication

Number Designation
3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing (floating bearing)
● Protecting ring (rotating)
3.45* Corrugated spring/compression springs

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 149
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor

10.7.8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with permanent lubrication







Figure 10-16 Roller bearing cartridge, non-drive end, permanent lubrication

Table 10-16 Spare parts for roller bearing cartridge, non-drive end, permanent lubrication

Number Designation
4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing (locating bearing)
● Retaining ring
4.60* Inner bearing cover

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

150 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor

10.7.9 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)









Figure 10-17 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)

Table 10-17 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)

Number Designation Number Designation

4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing 4.80* Grease nipple
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(locating bearing)
● Retaining ring
4.60* Inner bearing cover 4.90* Cover of spent grease chamber

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 151
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor

10.7.10 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)











Figure 10-18 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)

Table 10-18 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)

Number Designation Number Designation

4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing 4.80* Grease nipple
● Deep-groove ball bearing 4.60* Inner bearing cover
(locating bearing)
● Retaining ring

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

152 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor

10.7.11 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, "Performance"









Figure 10-19 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing

Table 10-19 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing

Number Designation Number Designation

4.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bear‐ 4.80* Grease nipple
ing
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(locating bearing)
● Shrink ring
4.60* Inner bearing cover 4.90* Cover of spent grease chamber

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 153
Spare parts
10.8 Terminal box

10.8 Terminal box








Figure 10-20 Terminal box

Table 10-20 Spare parts for terminal box

Number Designation Number Designation

20.20* Enclosure 20.50* Entry plate
20.30* Cover 20.60* Adapter plate (optional)

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

154 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Spare parts
10.9 Speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)

10.9 Speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)







Figure 10-21 Speed encoder

Table 10-21 Spare part, speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)

Part Description
55.00 Spare parts kit, speed encoder
● Speed encoder
● Torque arm
55.71 Cable with plug connector
6.80* Cover

* On request

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 155
Spare parts
10.10 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.)

10.10 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.)







Figure 10-22 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.)

Table 10-22 Spare part, speed encoder (type 1PH828.)

Part Description Part Description

6.80 Cover 55.63 Torque arm
55.12 Speed encoder 55.71 Cable with plug connector

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

156 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Disposal 11
Protecting the environment and preserving its resources are corporate goals of the highest
priority for us. Our worldwide environmental management system to ISO 14001 ensures
compliance with legislation and sets high standards in this regard. Environmentally friendly
design, technical safety and health protection are always firm goals even at the product
development stage.
Recommendations for the environmentally friendly disposal of the machine and its components
are given in the following section. Be sure to comply with local disposal regulations.

Country-specific legislation

The machine uses materials that can be recovered or recycled. Correctly separating materials
helps to simply recycle important materials.
● When disposing of the machine or of waste that is created during the individual phases of
its life cycle, please observe the statutory requirements applicable in the country of use.
● Please contact your local authorities for more information about disposal.

11.1 RoHS - restricting the use of certain hazardous substances

In compliance with RoHS ("Restriction of certain Hazardous Substances" ) we replace
substances that are damaging to the environment by those that are not based on state-of-the-
art technology. In doing so, safety in operation and handling will take priority at all times.

11.2 Information according to Article 33 of the REACH regulation

This product contains one or several subproducts in which the following substance – belonging
to the "list of candidates" – exists in a concentration exceeding 0.1 percent by weight.
● CAS No. 7439-92-1, lead
Based on the currently available information, we assume that this substance does not
represent any risk when correctly used, including its disposal.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 157
Disposal
11.3 Preparing for disassembly

11.3 Preparing for disassembly

Disassembly of the machine must be carried out and/or supervised by qualified personnel with
appropriate expert knowledge.
1. Contact a certified waste disposal organization in your vicinity. Clarify what is expected in
terms of the quality of dismantling the machine and provision of the components.
2. Follow the five safety rules (Page 15).
3. Disconnect all electrical connections and remove all cables.
4. Remove all liquids such as oil and cooling liquids. Collect the liquids separately and dispose
of them in a professional manner.
5. Detach the machine fixings.
6. Transport the machine to a suitable location for disassembly.

See also
Maintenance (Page 105)

11.4 Dismantling the machine

Dismantle the machine using the general procedures commonly used in mechanical
engineering.

WARNING
Machine parts can fall
The machine is made up of heavy parts. These parts are liable to fall during dismantling. This
can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Before you release any machine parts, secure them so that they cannot fall.

11.5 Disposal of components

Components
The machines consist mainly of steel and various proportions of copper and aluminum. Metals
are generally considered to be unlimitedly recyclable.
Sort the components for recycling according to whether they are:
● Iron and steel
● Aluminum
● Non-ferrous metal, e.g. windings
The winding insulation is incinerated during copper recycling.
● Insulating materials

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

158 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Disposal
11.5 Disposal of components

● Cables and wires

● Electronic waste

Process materials and chemicals

Sort the process materials and chemicals for recycling according to whether they are for
example:
● Oil
● Grease
● Cleaning substances and solvents
● Paint residues
● Anti-corrosion agent
● Coolant additives such as inhibitors, antifreeze or biocides
Dispose of the separated components according to local regulations or via a specialist disposal
company. The same applies for cloths and cleaning substances which have been used while
working on the machine.

Packaging material
● If necessary, contact a suitable specialist disposal company.
● Wooden packaging for sea transport consists of impregnated wood. Observe the local
regulations.
● The foil used for water-proof packaging is an aluminum composite foil. It can be recycled
thermally. Dirty foil must be disposed of via waste incineration.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 159
Disposal
11.5 Disposal of components

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

160 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Service and Support A
* Based on the serial number stamped on the rating plate, you can identify where the machine
was manufactured and where you can have your questions answered:
● No:N... = Nuremberg
● No.UC... = Frenstat

See also
Description (Page 21)

More information
Information on the following topics is available at:
● Ordering documentation / overview of documentation
● Additional links to download documents
● Using documentation online (find and search in manuals / information)
More information (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/108998034)
If you have any questions regarding the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions,
corrections), please send an e-mail to the following address E-mail
(mailto:[email protected]).

My support
The following link provides information on how to create your own individual documentation
based on Siemens content, and adapt it for your own machine documentation:
My support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/de/en/documentation)

Note
If you want to use this function, you must first register.
Later, you can log on with your login data.

Training
The following link provides information on SITRAIN - training from Siemens for products,
systems and automation engineering solutions:
SITRAIN (http://siemens.com/sitrain)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 161
Service and Support

Technical Support
Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided on the Internet under
Contact:
Technical Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com)

Websites of third parties

This publication contains hyperlinks to websites of third parties. Siemens does not take any
responsibility for the contents of these websites or adopt any of these websites or their contents
as their own, because Siemens does not control the information on these websites and is also
not responsible for the contents and information provided there. Use of these websites is at the
risk of the person doing so.

Internet address for products

Products (http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol)

Siemens Support for on the move

With the "Siemens Industry Online Support" App, you can access more than
300,000 documents for Siemens Industry products – any time and any‐
where. The App supports you in the following areas:
● Resolving problems when executing a project
● Troubleshooting when faults develop
● Expanding a system or planning a new system
Further, you have access to the Technical Forum and other articles that our
experts have drawn-up:
● FAQs
● Application examples
● Manuals
● Certificates
● Product announcements and many more
The app is available for Apple iOS, Android and Windows Phone.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

162 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Technical specifications B
B.1 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections
Bolt locking devices
● Refit nuts or bolts that are mounted together with locking, resilient, and/or force-distributing
elements with identical, fully-functional elements when re-assembling. Always renew keyed
elements.
● When screwing together threads secured with a liquid adhesive, use a suitable medium
such as Loctite 243.
● Always use suitable securing devices or removable adhesives (e.g., Loctite 243) when
installing fixing bolts with a clamping length of less than 25 mm. The clamping length is taken
as the distance between the head of the bolt and the point at which the bolt is screwed in.

Tightening torques
The bolted connections with metal contact surfaces, such as end shields, bearing cartridge
parts, terminal box parts bolted onto the stator frame, should be tightened to the following
torques, depending on the thread size:

Table B-1 Tightening torques for bolted connections with a tolerance of ±10%.

Case M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36 M42 M48 M56
A 1.2 2.5 4 8 13 20 40 52 80 150 - - - - Nm
B 1.3 2.6 4.5 11 22 38 92 180 310 620 1080 1700 2600 4200 Nm
C 3 5 8 20 40 70 170 340 600 1200 2000 3100 4700 7500 Nm

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 163
Technical specifications
B.1 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections

Applications
The above-mentioned tightening torques apply for the following applications:
● Case A
Applies to electrical connections in which the permissible torque is normally limited by the
bolt materials and/or the current carrying capacity of the insulators, with the exception of the
busbar connections in case B.
● Case B
Applies to bolts screwed into components made from materials with lower property class
(e. g. aluminum) and to bolts with property class 8.8 according to ISO 898-1.
● Case C
Applies to bolts with property class 8.8, A4-70 or A4-80 according to ISO 898-1, however
only to bolts screwed into components made from materials with higher property class, e.g.
cast iron, steel or cast steel.
Note
Non-standard tightening torques
Different tightening torques for electrical connections and bolted connections for parts with
flat seals or insulating parts are specified in the relevant sections and drawings.

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

164 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Quality documents C
You can find the quality documents here:
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/ps/13358/cert (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13358/cert)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 165
Quality documents

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

166 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Additional documents D
D.1 Reader notes on the operating instructions of the holding brake

Holding brake
Depending on the order, a special version of a holding brake from the Stromag company is
mounted. Various types of holding brake are mounted depending on the shaft height.

NOTICE
Technical data for the special version of the holding brake
The following technical data applies to the special version of the mounted holding brake. The
corresponding data in the manufacturers operating instructions do not apply.

Table D-1 Technical data of the holding brake

Technical data NFF-A 63 NFF-A 100

1PH818. (SH180) 1PH822. (SH225)

Braking torque MBrake [Nm] 1000 1600
Max. speed nBrake [rpm] 3500 3100
Weight incl. hollow shaft mbrake [kg] 63 88
Moment of inertia Jbrake [kgm ] 2
0.022 0.051
Total moment of inertia (emer‐ Jtotal [kgm2] 1.3 3.9
gency stop)
Rated voltage U [V] 230 V (AC) 230 V (AC)
Permitted single switched energy P [W] 98 210
Coil current I [A] 2.21 2.70
Number of emergency stops Z - 2000 1200
Opening time [ms] 300 300
Closing time [ms] 80 100

Note
More information
● Commissioning (Page 87)

See also
Operating instructions, holding brake (Page 169)

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 167
Additional documents
D.1 Reader notes on the operating instructions of the holding brake

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

168 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Additional documents
D.2 Operating instructions, holding brake

D.2 Operating instructions, holding brake

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 169
Additional documents
D.2 Operating instructions, holding brake

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

170 Operating Instructions 01/2019
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
D.3 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction,
SH180

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 193
Additional documents
D.3 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH180

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

194 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION

Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 danger to persons.
[email protected] These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
www.ebmpapst.com The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
CONTENTS These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1
1.2 Staff qualifications 1 These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
1.3 Basic safety rules 1 potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
1.4 Voltage 1
DANGER
1.5 Safety and protective features 2
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 2
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
1.7 Mechanical movement 2
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
1.8 Emissions 2
1.9 Hot surface 2 WARNING
1.10 Transport 2 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
1.11 Storage 2 death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
2. INTENDED USE 3
CAUTION
3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
3.1 Product drawing 4 minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
3.2 Nominal data 5 actions are not taken.
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 5 NOTE
3.4 Technical description 5 A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
3.5 Mounting data 6 lead to property damage.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions 6
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 6 1.2 Staff qualifications
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
4.1 Mechanical connection 6 maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
4.2 Electrical connection 6 authorized technical staff.
4.3 Connection in terminal box 7 Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
4.4 Factory settings 8 out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
4.5 Connection diagram 9
1.3 Basic safety rules
4.6 Checking connections 10
4.7 Switching on the device 10 The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
4.8 Switching off the device 10 following installation in the final product.
The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be
Translation of the original operating instructions

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 observed when working on the device.

Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE 10 increases the risk of accidents.
CAUSES AND REMEDIES Note the following when working on the device:
6.1 Vibration testing 11
; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
6.2 Cleaning 11
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
6.3 Safety inspection 11
6.4 Disposal 11 1.4 Voltage
; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.

195

Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 1 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

WARNING 1.7 Mechanical movement

Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off DANGER
Electric shock Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
the impeller.
before opening the device.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
CAUTION
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
parts have come to a standstill.
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. WARNING
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
CAUTION can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, can result.
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
failure.
while working on rotating parts.
Risk of injury
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it 1.8 Emissions
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop. WARNING
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
objects from the device. the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
1.5 Safety and protective features → Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
DANGER
equipment such as hearing protection.
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning → Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation. 1.9 Hot surface
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and CAUTION
guard grille. High temperature on electronics housing
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the Risk of burns
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at → Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. 1.10 Transport
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you NOTE
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured Transporting the device
adequately.
→ Transport the device in its original packaging only.
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
Translation of the original operating instructions

ineffective protective device. → Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a
lashing strip.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
1.11 Storage
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
with open- and closed-loop control devices. ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
shielding measures have to be taken by the user. packaging in a clean environment.
; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
NOTE
installation.
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
service life.
; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
described prior to commissioning.
; Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.

196

Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 2 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
● The device is only to be used in IT networks with a permissible
maximum voltage of 277 V between the phase conductors.
● Use of the device in stationary systems only.
● Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
● Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
● Operating the device with all protective devices.
● Following the operating instructions.

Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
● Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
● Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
● Opening the terminal box during operation.
● Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
● Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
● Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
● Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
● Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
● Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
● Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
Translation of the original operating instructions

protective devices.
● In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.

197

Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 3 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3. TECHNICAL DATA

3.1 Product drawing

All dimensions in mm.

1 Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L
1.3 N
1.4 NC
Translation of the original operating instructions

1.5 COM
1.6 GND
1.7 0-10 V
1.8 +10 V
2 Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3 Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm

198

Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 4 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description

Motor M3G084-DF Weight 11.8 kg
Fan size 250 mm
Phase 1~ Rotor surface Painted black
Nominal voltage / VAC 230 Electronics housing Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Nominal voltage 200 .. 277 material
range / VAC Impeller material PA plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Frequency / Hz 50/60 Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Method of obtaining ml Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
data Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2900 Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
Power consumption / W 245 plastic (RAL 9005)
Current draw / A 1.1 Number of blades 7
Min. ambient -25 Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
temperature / °C Degree of protection IP55
Max. ambient 60 Insulation class "F"
temperature / °C Moisture (F) / H1
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air Environmental (H)
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment protection class
Subject to change Installation position Any
Control input 0-10 V / PWM Control range for modulation level 50-100% Condensation None
Alarm relay activates on warning "Module temperature 101°C" drainage holes
Mode S1
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ Motor bearing Ball bearing
2011 Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
- Operation and alarm display
Actual Req. 2015 - Alarm relay
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 46.8 43.8 - Integrated PID controller
02 Measurement category A - Power limiter
03 Efficiency category Static - Motor current limitation
04 Efficiency grade N 64 61 - PFC, active
05 Variable speed drive Yes - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the - Soft start
product's rating label. - Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart - Control interface with SELV potential
· HRA 590344 safely disconnected from the mains
D-74673 Mulfingen - Thermal overload protection for
08 Type K3G250-RR03-H4 electronics/motor
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.23 - Line undervoltage / phase failure
09 Air flow qv / m³/h 705 detection
09 Pressure increase total psf / 486 Touch current <= 3.5 mA
Translation of the original operating instructions

Pa according to IEC
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2905 60990 (measuring
11 Specific ratio* 1.01 circuit Fig. 4, TN
12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is system)
provided in the operating instructions. Electrical hookup Via terminal box
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and
maintenance is provided in the operating Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
instructions. internally connected
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
efficiency that are not apparent from the
customer to the housing's connection point)
measurement category are detailed in the
CE declaration. Conformity with EN 61800-5-1; CE
*
standards
Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa
Approval C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1;
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller
combination in a standardized measurement setup. EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730

199

Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 5 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for 4.1 Mechanical connection
support.
; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
Information on surface quality from packaging
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial → Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional → Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over CAUTION
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the Heavy load when unpacking device
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in → Two people should work together to remove the device from
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. its packaging.

3.5 Mounting data NOTE

Damage to the device from vibration
Strength class of 8.8 Bearing damage, shorter service life
screws → The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self- from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
locking screws). ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. attachment of the fan to the substructure.
; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
3.6 Transport and storage conditions transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
Max. permitted +80 °C
; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
ambient temp. for
be installed.
motor (transport/
storage) ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
Min. permitted -40 °C CAUTION
ambient temp. for Possible damage to the device
motor (transport/ If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
storage)
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
● The fan must not be strained on fastening.
EMC immunity to According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
interference environment) 4.2 Electrical connection
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference According to EN 61000-6-3 (household DANGER
Voltage on the device
Translation of the original operating instructions

emission environment)
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.

200

Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 6 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

DANGER 4.2.2 Reactive currents

Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
with multiple devices connected in parallel. limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
Electric shock, risk of injury reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. on.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections. ● The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
● At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
CAUTION
(operational readiness) is typically < 4 W.
Voltage
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. 4.2.3 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch. If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
switched back on. while operating the device. When the device power supply is
NOTE switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
Water ingress into wires or cables integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
device. circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
environment. 4.2.4 Locked-rotor protection
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
an all-pole disconnection switch.
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).

4.2.1 Requirements
4.3 Connection in terminal box
; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data. 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
the device voltage. sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
nameplate.
NOTE
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
used.
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum → This must be checked by the user.
cable cross-section is at least
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
; Note the following when routing the cables: WARNING
Translation of the original operating instructions

For permanently installed lines, the bending radius must be at least Live terminals and connections even with device
four times the outside diameter of the cable. switched off
For movable lines, the bending radius must be at least 15 times the Electric shock
outside diameter of the cable. → Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
; Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra box.
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
symbol and a hole.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
; Seal the terminal box.

201

Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 7 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.3.3 Cable routing

Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.

4.4 Factory settings

Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 10
Save set value to No
EEPROM
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 1
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 2
Translation of the original operating instructions

202

Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 8 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.5 Connection diagram

Drawing preliminary!

No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment

1 1, 2 PE green/ Protective earth
yellow
1 3 N blue Power supply, neutral conductor, 50/60 Hz
1 5 L black Power supply, phase, 50/60 Hz
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact; break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10
mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact; common connection, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min.
10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value); 0-10 V; Ri = 100 kΩ; adjustable curve
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB
Translation of the original operating instructions

2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA

2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%; max. 10 mA; short-circuit-proof; power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot)

203

Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 9 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.6 Checking connections 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES

; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
; Make sure a restart is impossible automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
; Check the cables for proper fit. Fault Safety feature description/
; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening function
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover Blocked rotor ; After the blockage is
closes without resistance. removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
Line undervoltage (line voltage ; If the line voltage returns to
the threads.
outside of permitted nominal permitted values, the motor
; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that voltage range) restarts automatically.
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.

4.7 Switching on the device

6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety CAUSES AND REMEDIES
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
papst for repair or replacement.
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
Hot motor housing
switched off
Risk of fire
Electric shock
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
located close to the fan.
before opening the device.
; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage
and make sure the protective devices are functional. CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
foreign matter found. failure.
; Apply the nominal supply voltage. Risk of injury
; Start the device by changing the input signal. → Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
NOTE the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
Damage to the device from vibration cannot be switched back on.
Bearing damage, shorter service life → Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the → After working on the device, remove any tools or other
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for objects from the device.
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
Translation of the original operating instructions

any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.

levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be
determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with Impeller not Imbalance in rotating Clean the device;
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with running smoothly parts replace it if imbalance
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature persists after cleaning.
failure. Make sure no
weight clips are
4.8 Switching off the device removed during
Switching off the device during operation: cleaning.
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
; Switch off the device via the control input. from supply and
; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power remove mechanical
supply. blockage.
Switching off the device for maintenance: Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
; Switch off the device via the control input. restore power
supply, apply control
; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
signal.
supply.
; Disconnect the device from the power supply.
;204
When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.

Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 10 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

Faulty connection Isolate from supply, 6.2 Cleaning

correct connection;
see connection NOTE
diagram. Damage to the device during cleaning
Thermal overload Allow motor to cool Malfunction possible
protector activated off, locate and rectify → Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
cause of error, → Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
release restart lockout
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
if necessary
Motor/electronics Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let 6.3 Safety inspection
overtemperature the device cool down.
To reset the error NOTE
message, switch off High-voltage test
the line voltage for at The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
least 25 s and then is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
switch it on again. → Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
too high temperature. corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
Reset by reducing the standard.
control input to 0.
Impermissible point of Correct the operating What to check How to check How often What action?
operation point. Let the device Contact Visual inspection At least every Repair or
cool down. protection 6 months replacement of
cover for device
In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst. intactness or
damage
Device for Visual inspection At least every Replacement of
damage to 6 months device
6.1 Vibration testing blades and
Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694. housing
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/ Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in cables 6 months
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this. Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten
protective earth 6 months
terminal
Insulation of Visual inspection At least every Replace cables
cables for 6 months
damage
Impeller for Visual inspection At least every Clean impeller
wear/deposits/ 6 months or replace device
corrosion and
damage
Tightness of Visual inspection At least every Retighten,
Translation of the original operating instructions

cable gland 6 months replace if

damaged
Abnormal acoustic At least every Replace device
bearing noise 6 months

6.4 Disposal
Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation top priority corporate goals.
situation. ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.

205

Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 11 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements

NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.

6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.

6.4.3 Component disposal

The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
● Steel and iron
● Aluminum
● Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
● Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
● Insulating materials
● Cables and wires
● Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
Translation of the original operating instructions

manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
● Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
● Power cables
● Cables for internal wiring
● Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.

→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.

206

Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 12 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
D.4 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction,
SH225

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 207
Additional documents
D.4 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH225

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

208 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION

Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 danger to persons.
[email protected] These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
www.ebmpapst.com The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
CONTENTS These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1
1.2 Staff qualifications 1 These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
1.3 Basic safety rules 1 potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
1.4 Voltage 1
DANGER
1.5 Safety and protective features 2
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 2
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
1.7 Mechanical movement 2
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
1.8 Emissions 2
1.9 Hot surface 2 WARNING
1.10 Transport 2 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
1.11 Storage 2 death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
2. INTENDED USE 3
CAUTION
3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
3.1 Product drawing 4 minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
3.2 Nominal data 5 actions are not taken.
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 5 NOTE
3.4 Technical description 5 A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
3.5 Mounting data 6 lead to property damage.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions 6
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 6 1.2 Staff qualifications
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
4.1 Mechanical connection 6 maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
4.2 Electrical connection 6 authorized technical staff.
4.3 Connection in terminal box 7 Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
4.4 Factory settings 8 out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
4.5 Connection diagram 9
1.3 Basic safety rules
4.6 Checking connections 10
4.7 Switching on the device 10 The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
4.8 Switching off the device 10 following installation in the final product.
The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be
Translation of the original operating instructions

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 observed when working on the device.

Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE 11 increases the risk of accidents.
CAUSES AND REMEDIES Note the following when working on the device:
6.1 Vibration testing 11
; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
6.2 Cleaning 11
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
6.3 Safety inspection 11
6.4 Disposal 12 1.4 Voltage
; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.

209

Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 1 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

WARNING 1.7 Mechanical movement

Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off DANGER
Electric shock Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
the impeller.
before opening the device.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
CAUTION
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
parts have come to a standstill.
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. WARNING
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
CAUTION can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, can result.
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
failure.
while working on rotating parts.
Risk of injury
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it 1.8 Emissions
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop. WARNING
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
objects from the device. the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
1.5 Safety and protective features → Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
DANGER
equipment such as hearing protection.
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning → Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation. 1.9 Hot surface
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and CAUTION
guard grille. High temperature on electronics housing
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the Risk of burns
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at → Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. 1.10 Transport
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you WARNING
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured Transporting the fan
adequately. Injuries from tipping or slipping
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or → The fan is always to be transported with care and in its
Translation of the original operating instructions

ineffective protective device. original packaging. #If set down too hard or at an angle for
example, the impact can lead to bearing damage or
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
deformation of the frame or impeller. #It must be ensured that
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction the fans cannot tip over during transportation and handling.
with open- and closed-loop control devices. → Secure the fan(s) with appropriate equipment such as a
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate lashing strip so that nothing can slip or tip, especially when
shielding measures have to be taken by the user. stacking multiple fans. #Also make allowance for possible
NOTE wind forces.
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment. 1.11 Storage
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
packaging in a clean environment.
; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
service life.
210

Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 2 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as

described prior to commissioning.
; Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.

2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
● The device is only to be used in IT networks with a permissible
maximum voltage of 277 V between the phase conductors.
● Use of the device in stationary systems only.
● Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
● Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
● Operating the device with all protective devices.
● Following the operating instructions.

Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
● Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
● Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
● Opening the terminal box during operation.
● Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
● Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
Translation of the original operating instructions

● Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
● Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
● Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
● Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
● Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
● In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.

211

Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 3 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3. TECHNICAL DATA

3.1 Product drawing

All dimensions in mm.

1 Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L
1.3 N
1.4 NC
Translation of the original operating instructions

1.5 COM
1.6 GND
1.7 0-10 V
1.8 +10 V
2 Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3 Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm

212

Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 4 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description

Motor M3G084-DF Weight 17.5 kg
Fan size 280 mm
Phase 1~ Rotor surface Painted black
Nominal voltage / VAC 230 Electronics housing Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Nominal voltage 200 .. 277 material
range / VAC Impeller material PP plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Frequency / Hz 50/60 Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Method of obtaining ml Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
data Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2550 Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
Power consumption / W 460 plastic (RAL 9005)
Current draw / A 2.0 Number of blades 6
Min. ambient -25 Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
temperature / °C Degree of protection IP55
Max. ambient 60 Insulation class "F"
temperature / °C Moisture (F) / H1
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air Environmental (H)
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment protection class
Subject to change Installation position Any
Condensation None
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ drainage holes
2011 Mode S1
Actual Req. 2015 Motor bearing Ball bearing
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 56.2 46.8 Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
02 Measurement category A - Operation and alarm display
- Alarm relay
03 Efficiency category Static
- Integrated PID controller
04 Efficiency grade N 70.4 61
- Power limiter
05 Variable speed drive Yes
- Motor current limitation
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label. - PFC, active
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart - Soft start
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
- Control interface with SELV potential
08 Type K3G280-RR03-H4
safely disconnected from the mains
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.44
- Thermal overload protection for
09 Air flow qv / m³/h 1605
electronics/motor
09 Pressure increase total psf / 512 - Line undervoltage / phase failure
Pa detection
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2560 Touch current <= 3.5 mA
Translation of the original operating instructions

11 Specific ratio* 1.01 according to IEC

12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
60990 (measuring
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and circuit Fig. 4, TN
maintenance is provided in the operating system)
instructions. Electrical hookup Via terminal box
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
measurement category are detailed in the internally connected
CE declaration. Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
* Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa customer to the housing's connection point)
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller Conformity with EN 61800-5-1; CE
combination in a standardized measurement setup. standards
Approval C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1;
EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730

213

Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 5 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for 4.1 Mechanical connection
support.
; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
Information on surface quality from packaging
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial → Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional → Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over CAUTION
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the Heavy load when unpacking device
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in → Two people should work together to remove the device from
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. its packaging.

3.5 Mounting data NOTE

Damage to the device from vibration
Strength class of 8.8 Bearing damage, shorter service life
screws → The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self- from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
locking screws). ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. attachment of the fan to the substructure.
; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
3.6 Transport and storage conditions transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
Max. permitted +80 °C
; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
ambient temp. for
be installed.
motor (transport/
storage) ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
Min. permitted -40 °C CAUTION
ambient temp. for Possible damage to the device
motor (transport/ If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
storage)
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
● The fan must not be strained on fastening.
EMC immunity to According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
interference environment) 4.2 Electrical connection
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference According to EN 61000-6-3 (household DANGER
Voltage on the device
Translation of the original operating instructions

emission environment)
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.

214

Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 6 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

DANGER 4.2.2 Reactive currents

Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
with multiple devices connected in parallel. limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
Electric shock, risk of injury reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. on.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections. ● The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
● At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
CAUTION
(operational readiness) is typically < 4 W.
Voltage
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. 4.2.3 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch. If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
switched back on. while operating the device. When the device power supply is
NOTE switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
Water ingress into wires or cables integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
device. circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
environment. 4.2.4 Locked-rotor protection
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
an all-pole disconnection switch.
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).

4.2.1 Requirements
4.3 Connection in terminal box
; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data. 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
the device voltage. sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
nameplate.
NOTE
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
used.
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum → This must be checked by the user.
cable cross-section is at least
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
; Note the following when routing the cables: WARNING
Translation of the original operating instructions

For permanently installed lines, the bending radius must be at least Live terminals and connections even with device
four times the outside diameter of the cable. switched off
For movable lines, the bending radius must be at least 15 times the Electric shock
outside diameter of the cable. → Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
; Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra box.
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
symbol and a hole.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
; Seal the terminal box.

215

Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 7 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.3.3 Cable routing

Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.

4.4 Factory settings

Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 10
Save set value to No
EEPROM
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 1
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 2
Translation of the original operating instructions

216

Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 8 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.5 Connection diagram

Drawing preliminary!

No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment

1 1, 2 PE green/ Protective earth
yellow
1 3 N blue Power supply, neutral conductor, 50/60 Hz
1 5 L black Power supply, phase, 50/60 Hz
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact; break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10
mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact; common connection, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min.
10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value); 0-10 V; Ri = 100 kΩ; adjustable curve
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB
Translation of the original operating instructions

2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA

2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%; max. 10 mA; short-circuit-proof; power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot)

217

Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 9 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.6 Checking connections 4.8 Switching off the device

; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). Switching off the device during operation:
; Make sure a restart is impossible ; Switch off the device via the control input.
; Check the cables for proper fit. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening supply.
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. Switching off the device for maintenance:
; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover ; Switch off the device via the control input.
closes without resistance. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to supply.
the threads. ; Disconnect the device from the power supply.
; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that ; When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.

4.7 Switching on the device

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or Fault Safety feature description/
similar connectors by the customer. function
WARNING Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Hot motor housing Blocked rotor ; After the blockage is
Risk of fire removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the fan. Line undervoltage (line voltage ; If the line voltage returns to
outside of permitted nominal permitted values, the motor
; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage voltage range) restarts automatically.
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any
foreign matter found.
; Apply the nominal supply voltage.
; Start the device by changing the input signal.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
Translation of the original operating instructions

levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be

determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
failure.

→ The maximum permissible vibration severity must not

exceed 3.5 mm/s and should be checked at intervals of 6
months. #It is to be measured at the motor mount at the
motor support plate in all three 3 dimensions, see Chapter 6.
Maintenance, malfunctions, possible causes and remedies.

218

Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 10 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient

too high temperature.
CAUSES AND REMEDIES Reset by reducing
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm- control input to 0.
papst for repair or replacement. Impermissible point of Correct the operating
operation point. Let the device
WARNING
cool down.
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
6.1 Vibration testing
CAUTION
Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
failure.
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Impeller not Imbalance in rotating Clean the device;
running smoothly parts replace it if imbalance
persists after cleaning.
Make sure no
weight clips are
removed during Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of
cleaning. the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate situation.
from supply and
remove mechanical 6.2 Cleaning
blockage.
NOTE
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
Damage to the device during cleaning
restore power
Malfunction possible
supply, apply control
Translation of the original operating instructions

signal. → Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.

Faulty connection Isolate from supply, → Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
correct connection; → Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
see connection
diagram. 6.3 Safety inspection
Thermal overload Allow motor to cool
protector activated off, locate and rectify NOTE
cause of error, High-voltage test
release restart lockout The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
if necessary is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
Motor/electronics Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let → Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
overtemperature the device cool down. legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
To reset the error corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
message, switch off the standard.
the line voltage for at What to check How to check How often What action?
least 25 s and then
Contact Visual inspection At least every Repair or
switch it on again.
protection 6 months replacement of
cover for device
intactness or
damage
219

Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 11 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

Device for Visual inspection At least every Replacement of 6.4.3 Component disposal
damage to 6 months device
The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
blades and
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
housing
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten
cables 6 months ● Steel and iron
Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten ● Aluminum
protective earth 6 months ● Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
terminal ● Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
Insulation of Visual inspection At least every Replace cables with marking
cables for 6 months
● Insulating materials
damage
Impeller for Visual inspection At least every Clean impeller ● Cables and wires
wear/deposits/ 6 months or replace device ● Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
corrosion and Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
damage rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
Tightness of Visual inspection At least every Retighten,
; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
cable gland 6 months replace if
and steel.
damaged
Abnormal acoustic At least every Replace device Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
bearing noise 6 months made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
Vibration test Vibration tester, Recommended Clean impeller manner.
start-up or every 6 months or replace device The materials concerned are as follows:
deceleration ● Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
measurement ● Power cables
● Cables for internal wiring
6.4 Disposal
● Electrolytic capacitors
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
top priority corporate goals. electronic scrap.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented → Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
Translation of the original operating instructions

occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The

corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.

6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.

220

Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 12 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
D.5 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing,
SH180

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 221
Additional documents
D.5 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

222 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION

Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 danger to persons.
[email protected] These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
www.ebmpapst.com The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
CONTENTS These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1
1.2 Staff qualifications 1 These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
1.3 Basic safety rules 1 potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
1.4 Voltage 1
DANGER
1.5 Safety and protective features 2
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 2
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
1.7 Mechanical movement 2
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
1.8 Emissions 2
1.9 Hot surface 2 WARNING
1.10 Transport 2 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
1.11 Storage 2 death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
2. INTENDED USE 3
CAUTION
3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
3.1 Product drawing 4 minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
3.2 Nominal data 5 actions are not taken.
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 5 NOTE
3.4 Technical description 5 A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
3.5 Mounting data 6 lead to property damage.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions 6
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 6 1.2 Staff qualifications
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
4.1 Mechanical connection 6 maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
4.2 Electrical connection 6 authorized technical staff.
4.3 Connection in terminal box 7 Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
4.4 Factory settings 8 out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
4.5 Connection diagram 9
1.3 Basic safety rules
4.6 Checking connections 10
4.7 Switching on the device 10 The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
4.8 Switching off the device 10 following installation in the final product.
Note the following when working on the device:
Translation of the original operating instructions

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE 10
CAUSES AND REMEDIES 1.4 Voltage
6.1 Vibration testing 11
6.2 Cleaning 11 ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
6.3 Safety inspection 11 Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
6.4 Disposal 11 ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock

223

Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 1 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles WARNING
before opening the device. Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
CAUTION
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
can result.
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. → Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, 1.8 Emissions
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure. WARNING
Risk of injury Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on. → Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop. → Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device. → Also observe the requirements of local agencies.

1.5 Safety and protective features 1.9 Hot surface

DANGER CAUTION
Protective device missing and protective device not High temperature on electronics housing
functioning Risk of burns
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for → Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and 1.10 Transport
guard grille. NOTE
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the Transporting the device
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at → Transport the device in its original packaging only.
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. → Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a
lashing strip.
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured 1.11 Storage
adequately.
; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
ineffective protective device.
packaging in a clean environment.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
Translation of the original operating instructions

with open- and closed-loop control devices. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
shielding measures have to be taken by the user. service life.
; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
NOTE
described prior to commissioning.
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment. ; Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
1.7 Mechanical movement
DANGER
Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
the impeller.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.

224

Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 2 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
● The device is only to be used in IT networks with a permissible
maximum voltage of 277 V between the phase conductors.
● Use of the device in stationary systems only.
● Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
● Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
● Operating the device with all protective devices.
● Following the operating instructions.

Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
● Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
● Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
● Opening the terminal box during operation.
● Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
● Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
● Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
● Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
● Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
● Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
● Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
Translation of the original operating instructions

protective devices.
● In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.

225

Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 3 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3. TECHNICAL DATA

3.1 Product drawing

All dimensions in mm.

1 Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L
1.3 N
1.4 NC
Translation of the original operating instructions

1.5 COM
1.6 GND
1.7 0-10 V
1.8 +10 V
2 Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3 Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Accessory part: Guard grill 20180-2-4039, filter 99950-2-5170 and filter mount 25180-2-4041 not included in scope of delivery.

226

Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 4 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description

Motor M3G084-DF Weight 11.8 kg
Fan size 250 mm
Phase 1~ Rotor surface Painted black
Nominal voltage / VAC 230 Electronics housing Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Nominal voltage 200 .. 277 material
range / VAC Impeller material PA plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Frequency / Hz 50/60 Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Method of obtaining ml/ce Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
data Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Speed (rpm) / min-1 3100 Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
Power consumption / W 300 plastic (RAL 9005)
Current draw / A 1.3 Number of blades 7
Min. ambient -25 Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
temperature / °C Degree of protection IP55
Max. ambient 60 Insulation class "F"
temperature / °C Moisture (F) / H1
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air Environmental (H)
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment protection class
Subject to change Installation position Any
Condensation None
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ drainage holes
2011 Mode S1
Actual Req. 2015 Motor bearing Ball bearing
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 49.7 44.8 Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
02 Measurement category A - Operation and alarm display
- Alarm relay
03 Efficiency category Static
- Integrated PID controller
04 Efficiency grade N 66 61
- Power limiter
05 Variable speed drive Yes
- Motor current limitation
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label. - PFC, active
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart - Soft start
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
- Control interface with SELV potential
08 Type K3G250-RR17-H9
safely disconnected from the mains
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.28
- Thermal overload protection for
09 Air flow qv / m³/h 805
electronics/motor
09 Pressure increase total psf / 574 - Line undervoltage / phase failure
Pa detection
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 3105 Touch current <= 3.5 mA
Translation of the original operating instructions

11 Specific ratio* 1.01 according to IEC

12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
60990 (measuring
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and circuit Fig. 4, TN
maintenance is provided in the operating system)
instructions. Electrical hookup Via terminal box
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
measurement category are detailed in the internally connected
CE declaration. Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
* Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa customer to the housing's connection point)
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller Conformity with EN 61800-5-1; CE
combination in a standardized measurement setup. standards
Approval UL 1004-7 + 60730; C22.2 No.77 +
CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC
Comment Operational is only permitted with the
optional guard grill available from ebm-
papst.

227

Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 5 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for 4.1 Mechanical connection
support.
; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
Information on surface quality from packaging
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial → Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional → Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over CAUTION
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the Heavy load when unpacking device
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in → Two people should work together to remove the device from
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. its packaging.

3.5 Mounting data NOTE

Damage to the device from vibration
; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self- Bearing damage, shorter service life
locking screws). → The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
Strength class of 8.8 from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
screws ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. attachment of the fan to the substructure.
; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
3.6 Transport and storage conditions transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
Max. permitted +80 °C
; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
ambient temp. for
be installed.
motor (transport/
storage) ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
Min. permitted -40 °C CAUTION
ambient temp. for Possible damage to the device
motor (transport/ If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
storage)
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
● The fan must not be strained on fastening.
EMC immunity to According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
interference environment) 4.2 Electrical connection
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference According to EN 61000-6-3 (household DANGER
Voltage on the device
Translation of the original operating instructions

emission environment)
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.

228

Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 6 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

DANGER 4.2.2 Reactive currents

Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
with multiple devices connected in parallel. limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
Electric shock, risk of injury reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. on.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections. ● The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
● At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
CAUTION
(operational readiness) is typically < 4 W.
Voltage
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. 4.2.3 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch. If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
switched back on. while operating the device. When the device power supply is
NOTE switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
Water ingress into wires or cables integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
device. circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
environment. 4.2.4 Locked-rotor protection
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
an all-pole disconnection switch.
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).

4.2.1 Requirements
4.3 Connection in terminal box
; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data. 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
the device voltage. sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
nameplate.
NOTE
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
used.
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum → This must be checked by the user.
cable cross-section is at least
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
; Note the following when routing the cables: WARNING
Translation of the original operating instructions

For permanently installed lines, the bending radius must be at least Live terminals and connections even with device
four times the outside diameter of the cable. switched off
For movable lines, the bending radius must be at least 15 times the Electric shock
outside diameter of the cable. → Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
; Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra box.
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
symbol and a hole.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
; Seal the terminal box.

229

Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 7 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.3.3 Cable routing

Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.

4.4 Factory settings

Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 10
Save set value to No
EEPROM
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 1
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 2
Translation of the original operating instructions

230

Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 8 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.5 Connection diagram

Drawing preliminary!

No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment

1 1, 2 PE green/ Protective earth
yellow
1 3 N blue Power supply, neutral conductor, 50/60 Hz
1 5 L black Power supply, phase, 50/60 Hz
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact; break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10
mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact; common connection, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min.
10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value); 0-10 V; Ri = 100 kΩ; adjustable curve
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB
Translation of the original operating instructions

2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA

2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%; max. 10 mA; short-circuit-proof; power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot)

231

Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 9 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.6 Checking connections 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES

; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
; Make sure a restart is impossible automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
; Check the cables for proper fit. Fault Safety feature description/
; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening function
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover Blocked rotor ; After the blockage is
closes without resistance. removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
Line undervoltage (line voltage ; If the line voltage returns to
the threads.
outside of permitted nominal permitted values, the motor
; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that voltage range) restarts automatically.
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.

4.7 Switching on the device

6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety CAUSES AND REMEDIES
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
papst for repair or replacement.
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
Hot motor housing
switched off
Risk of fire
Electric shock
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
located close to the fan.
before opening the device.
; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage
and make sure the protective devices are functional. CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
foreign matter found. failure.
; Apply the nominal supply voltage. Risk of injury
; Start the device by changing the input signal. → Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
NOTE the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
Damage to the device from vibration cannot be switched back on.
Bearing damage, shorter service life → Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the → After working on the device, remove any tools or other
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for objects from the device.
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
Translation of the original operating instructions

any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.

levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be
determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with Impeller not Imbalance in rotating Clean the device;
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with running smoothly parts replace it if imbalance
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature persists after cleaning.
failure. Make sure no
weight clips are
4.8 Switching off the device removed during
Switching off the device during operation: cleaning.
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
; Switch off the device via the control input. from supply and
; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power remove mechanical
supply. blockage.
Switching off the device for maintenance: Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
; Switch off the device via the control input. restore power
supply, apply control
; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
signal.
supply.
; Disconnect the device from the power supply.
;232
When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.

Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 10 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

Faulty connection Isolate from supply, 6.2 Cleaning

correct connection;
see connection NOTE
diagram. Damage to the device during cleaning
Thermal overload Allow motor to cool Malfunction possible
protector activated off, locate and rectify → Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
cause of error, → Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
release restart lockout
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
if necessary
Motor/electronics Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let 6.3 Safety inspection
overtemperature the device cool down.
To reset the error NOTE
message, switch off High-voltage test
the line voltage for at The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
least 25 s and then is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
switch it on again. → Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
too high temperature. corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
Reset by reducing the standard.
control input to 0.
Impermissible point of Correct the operating What to check How to check How often What action?
operation point. Let the device Contact Visual inspection At least every Repair or
cool down. protection 6 months replacement of
cover for device
In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst. intactness or
damage
Device for Visual inspection At least every Replacement of
damage to 6 months device
6.1 Vibration testing blades and
Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694. housing
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/ Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in cables 6 months
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this. Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten
protective earth 6 months
terminal
Insulation of Visual inspection At least every Replace cables
cables for 6 months
damage
Impeller for Visual inspection At least every Clean or
wear/deposits/ 6 months replace impeller
corrosion and
damage
Tightness of Visual inspection At least every Retighten,
Translation of the original operating instructions

cable gland 6 months replace if

damaged
Abnormal acoustic At least every Replace device
bearing noise 6 months

6.4 Disposal
Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation top priority corporate goals.
situation. ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.

233

Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 11 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements

NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.

6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.

6.4.3 Component disposal

The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
● Steel and iron
● Aluminum
● Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
● Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
● Insulating materials
● Cables and wires
● Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
Translation of the original operating instructions

manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
● Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
● Power cables
● Cables for internal wiring
● Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.

→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.

234

Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 12 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
D.6 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing,
SH225

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 235
Additional documents
D.6 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

236 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION

Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 danger to persons.
[email protected] These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
www.ebmpapst.com The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
CONTENTS These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1
1.2 Staff qualifications 1 These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
1.3 Basic safety rules 1 potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
1.4 Voltage 1
DANGER
1.5 Safety and protective features 2
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 2
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
1.7 Mechanical movement 2
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
1.8 Emissions 2
1.9 Hot surface 2 WARNING
1.10 Transport 2 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
1.11 Storage 2 death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
2. INTENDED USE 3
CAUTION
3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
3.1 Product drawing 4 minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
3.2 Nominal data 5 actions are not taken.
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 5 NOTE
3.4 Technical description 5 A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
3.5 Mounting data 6 lead to property damage.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions 6
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 6 1.2 Staff qualifications
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
4.1 Mechanical connection 6 maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
4.2 Electrical connection 6 authorized technical staff.
4.3 Connection in terminal box 7 Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
4.4 Factory settings 8 out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
4.5 Connection diagram 9
1.3 Basic safety rules
4.6 Checking connections 10
4.7 Switching on the device 10 The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
4.8 Switching off the device 10 following installation in the final product.
The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be
Translation of the original operating instructions

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 observed when working on the device.

Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE 11 increases the risk of accidents.
CAUSES AND REMEDIES Note the following when working on the device:
6.1 Vibration testing 11
; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
6.2 Cleaning 11
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
6.3 Safety inspection 11
6.4 Disposal 12 1.4 Voltage
; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.

237

Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 1 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

WARNING 1.7 Mechanical movement

Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off DANGER
Electric shock Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
the impeller.
before opening the device.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
CAUTION
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
parts have come to a standstill.
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. WARNING
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
CAUTION can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, can result.
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
failure.
while working on rotating parts.
Risk of injury
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it 1.8 Emissions
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop. WARNING
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
objects from the device. the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
1.5 Safety and protective features → Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
DANGER
equipment such as hearing protection.
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning → Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation. 1.9 Hot surface
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and CAUTION
guard grille. High temperature on electronics housing
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the Risk of burns
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at → Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. 1.10 Transport
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you WARNING
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured Transporting the fan
adequately. Injuries from tipping or slipping
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or → The fan is always to be transported with care and in its
Translation of the original operating instructions

ineffective protective device. original packaging. #If set down too hard or at an angle for
example, the impact can lead to bearing damage or
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
deformation of the frame or impeller. #It must be ensured that
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction the fans cannot tip over during transportation and handling.
with open- and closed-loop control devices. → Secure the fan(s) with appropriate equipment such as a
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate lashing strip so that nothing can slip or tip, especially when
shielding measures have to be taken by the user. stacking multiple fans. #Also make allowance for possible
NOTE wind forces.
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment. 1.11 Storage
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
packaging in a clean environment.
; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
service life.
238

Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 2 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as

described prior to commissioning.
; Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.

2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
● The device is only to be used in IT networks with a permissible
maximum voltage of 277 V between the phase conductors.
● Use of the device in stationary systems only.
● Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
● Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
● Operating the device with all protective devices.
● Following the operating instructions.

Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
● Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
● Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
● Opening the terminal box during operation.
● Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
● Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
Translation of the original operating instructions

● Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
● Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
● Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
● Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
● Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
● In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.

239

Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 3 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3. TECHNICAL DATA

3.1 Product drawing

All dimensions in mm.

1 Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L
1.3 N
1.4 NC
Translation of the original operating instructions

1.5 COM
1.6 GND
1.7 0-10 V
1.8 +10 V
2 Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3 Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Accessory part: Guard grill 20225-2-4039, filter 99951-2-5170 and filter mount 25225-2-4041 not included in scope of delivery.

240

Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 4 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description

Motor M3G084-DF Weight 16.8 kg
Fan size 280 mm
Phase 1~ Rotor surface Painted black
Nominal voltage / VAC 230 Electronics housing Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Nominal voltage 200 .. 277 material
range / VAC Impeller material PP plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Frequency / Hz 50/60 Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Method of obtaining ml Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
data Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2700 Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
Power consumption / W 520 plastic (RAL 9005)
Current draw / A 2.3 Number of blades 6
Min. ambient -25 Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
temperature / °C Degree of protection IP55
Max. ambient 60 Insulation class "F"
temperature / °C Moisture (F) / H1
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air Environmental (H)
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment protection class
Subject to change Installation position Any
Condensation None
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ drainage holes
2011 Mode S1
Actual Req. 2015 Motor bearing Ball bearing
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 58.6 47.4 Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
02 Measurement category A - Operation and alarm display
- Alarm relay
03 Efficiency category Static
- Integrated PID controller
04 Efficiency grade N 72.2 61
- Power limiter
05 Variable speed drive Yes
- Motor current limitation
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label. - PFC, active
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart - Soft start
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
- Control interface with SELV potential
08 Type K3G280-RR04-H9
safely disconnected from the mains
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.51
- Thermal overload protection for
09 Air flow qv / m³/h 1815
electronics/motor
09 Pressure increase total psf / 540 - Line undervoltage / phase failure
Pa detection
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2655 Touch current <= 3.5 mA
Translation of the original operating instructions

11 Specific ratio* 1.01 according to IEC

12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
60990 (measuring
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and circuit Fig. 4, TN
maintenance is provided in the operating system)
instructions. Electrical hookup Via terminal box
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
measurement category are detailed in the internally connected
CE declaration. Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
* Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa customer to the housing's connection point)
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller Conformity with EN 61800-5-1; CE
combination in a standardized measurement setup. standards
Approval UL 1004-7 + 60730; C22.2 No.77 +
CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC
Comment Operational is only permitted with the
optional guard grill available from ebm-
papst.

241

Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 5 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for 4.1 Mechanical connection
support.
; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
Information on surface quality from packaging
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial → Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional → Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over CAUTION
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the Heavy load when unpacking device
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in → Two people should work together to remove the device from
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. its packaging.

3.5 Mounting data NOTE

Damage to the device from vibration
Strength class of 8.8 Bearing damage, shorter service life
screws → The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self- from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
locking screws). ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. attachment of the fan to the substructure.
; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
3.6 Transport and storage conditions transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
Max. permitted +80 °C
; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
ambient temp. for
be installed.
motor (transport/
storage) ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
Min. permitted -40 °C CAUTION
ambient temp. for Possible damage to the device
motor (transport/ If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
storage)
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
● The fan must not be strained on fastening.
EMC immunity to According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
interference environment) 4.2 Electrical connection
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference According to EN 61000-6-3 (household DANGER
Voltage on the device
Translation of the original operating instructions

emission environment)
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.

242

Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 6 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

DANGER 4.2.2 Reactive currents

Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
with multiple devices connected in parallel. limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
Electric shock, risk of injury reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. on.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections. ● The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
● At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
CAUTION
(operational readiness) is typically < 4 W.
Voltage
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. 4.2.3 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch. If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
switched back on. while operating the device. When the device power supply is
NOTE switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
Water ingress into wires or cables integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
device. circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
environment. 4.2.4 Locked-rotor protection
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
an all-pole disconnection switch.
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).

4.2.1 Requirements
4.3 Connection in terminal box
; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data. 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
the device voltage. sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
nameplate.
NOTE
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
used.
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum → This must be checked by the user.
cable cross-section is at least
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
; Note the following when routing the cables: WARNING
Translation of the original operating instructions

For permanently installed lines, the bending radius must be at least Live terminals and connections even with device
four times the outside diameter of the cable. switched off
For movable lines, the bending radius must be at least 15 times the Electric shock
outside diameter of the cable. → Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
; Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra box.
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
symbol and a hole.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
; Seal the terminal box.

243

Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 7 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.3.3 Cable routing

Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.

4.4 Factory settings

Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 10
Save set value to No
EEPROM
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 1
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 2
Translation of the original operating instructions

244

Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 8 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.5 Connection diagram

Drawing preliminary!

No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment

1 1, 2 PE green/ Protective earth
yellow
1 3 N blue Power supply, neutral conductor, 50/60 Hz
1 5 L black Power supply, phase, 50/60 Hz
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact; break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10
mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact; common connection, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min.
10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value); 0-10 V; Ri = 100 kΩ; adjustable curve
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB
Translation of the original operating instructions

2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA

2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%; max. 10 mA; short-circuit-proof; power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot)

245

Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 9 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.6 Checking connections 4.8 Switching off the device

; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). Switching off the device during operation:
; Make sure a restart is impossible ; Switch off the device via the control input.
; Check the cables for proper fit. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening supply.
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. Switching off the device for maintenance:
; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover ; Switch off the device via the control input.
closes without resistance. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to supply.
the threads. ; Disconnect the device from the power supply.
; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that ; When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.

4.7 Switching on the device

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or Fault Safety feature description/
similar connectors by the customer. function
WARNING Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Hot motor housing Blocked rotor ; After the blockage is
Risk of fire removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the fan. Line undervoltage (line voltage ; If the line voltage returns to
outside of permitted nominal permitted values, the motor
; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage voltage range) restarts automatically.
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any
foreign matter found.
; Apply the nominal supply voltage.
; Start the device by changing the input signal.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
Translation of the original operating instructions

levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be

determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
failure.

→ The maximum permissible vibration severity must not

exceed 3.5 mm/s and should be checked at intervals of 6
months. #It is to be measured at the motor mount at the
motor support plate in all three 3 dimensions, see Chapter 6.
Maintenance, malfunctions, possible causes and remedies.

246

Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 10 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient

too high temperature.
CAUSES AND REMEDIES Reset by reducing
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm- control input to 0.
papst for repair or replacement. Impermissible point of Correct the operating
operation point. Let the device
WARNING
cool down.
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
6.1 Vibration testing
CAUTION
Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
failure.
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Impeller not Imbalance in rotating Clean the device;
running smoothly parts replace it if imbalance
persists after cleaning.
Make sure no
weight clips are
removed during Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of
cleaning. the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate situation.
from supply and
remove mechanical 6.2 Cleaning
blockage.
NOTE
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
Damage to the device during cleaning
restore power
Malfunction possible
supply, apply control
Translation of the original operating instructions

signal. → Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.

Faulty connection Isolate from supply, → Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
correct connection; → Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
see connection
diagram. 6.3 Safety inspection
Thermal overload Allow motor to cool
protector activated off, locate and rectify NOTE
cause of error, High-voltage test
release restart lockout The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
if necessary is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
Motor/electronics Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let → Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
overtemperature the device cool down. legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
To reset the error corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
message, switch off the standard.
the line voltage for at What to check How to check How often What action?
least 25 s and then
Contact Visual inspection At least every Repair or
switch it on again.
protection 6 months replacement of
cover for device
intactness or
damage
247

Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 11 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

Device for Visual inspection At least every Replacement of 6.4.3 Component disposal
damage to 6 months device
The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
blades and
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
housing
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten
cables 6 months ● Steel and iron
Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten ● Aluminum
protective earth 6 months ● Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
terminal ● Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
Insulation of Visual inspection At least every Replace cables with marking
cables for 6 months
● Insulating materials
damage
Impeller for Visual inspection At least every Clean impeller ● Cables and wires
wear/deposits/ 6 months or replace device ● Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
corrosion and Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
damage rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
Tightness of Visual inspection At least every Retighten,
; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
cable gland 6 months replace if
and steel.
damaged
Abnormal acoustic At least every Replace device Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
bearing noise 6 months made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
Vibration test Vibration tester, Recommended Clean impeller manner.
start-up or every 6 months or replace device The materials concerned are as follows:
deceleration ● Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
measurement ● Power cables
● Cables for internal wiring
6.4 Disposal
● Electrolytic capacitors
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
top priority corporate goals. electronic scrap.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented → Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
Translation of the original operating instructions

occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The

corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.

6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.

248

Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 12 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
D.7 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction,
SK180

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 249
Additional documents
D.7 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

250 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION

Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 danger to persons.
[email protected] These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
www.ebmpapst.com The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
CONTENTS These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1
1.2 Staff qualifications 1 These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
1.3 Basic safety rules 1 potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
1.4 Voltage 1
DANGER
1.5 Safety and protective features 2
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 2
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
1.7 Mechanical movement 2
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
1.8 Emissions 2
1.9 Hot surface 2 WARNING
1.10 Transport 2 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
1.11 Storage 2 death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
2. INTENDED USE 3
CAUTION
3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
3.1 Product drawing 4 minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
3.2 Nominal data 5 actions are not taken.
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 5 NOTE
3.4 Technical description 5 A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
3.5 Mounting data 6 lead to property damage.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions 6
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 6 1.2 Staff qualifications
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
4.1 Mechanical connection 6 maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
4.2 Electrical connection 6 authorized technical staff.
4.3 Connection in terminal box 7 Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
4.4 Factory settings 8 out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
4.5 Connection diagram 9
1.3 Basic safety rules
4.6 Checking connections 10
4.7 Switching on the device 10 The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
4.8 Switching off the device 10 following installation in the final product.
Note the following when working on the device:
Translation of the original operating instructions

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE 10
CAUSES AND REMEDIES 1.4 Voltage
6.1 Vibration testing 11
6.2 Cleaning 11 ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
6.3 Safety inspection 11 Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
6.4 Disposal 12 ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock

251

Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 1 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles WARNING
before opening the device. Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
CAUTION
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
can result.
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. → Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, 1.8 Emissions
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure. WARNING
Risk of injury Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on. → Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop. → Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device. → Also observe the requirements of local agencies.

1.5 Safety and protective features 1.9 Hot surface

DANGER CAUTION
Protective device missing and protective device not High temperature on electronics housing
functioning Risk of burns
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for → Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and 1.10 Transport
guard grille. NOTE
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the Transporting the device
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at → Transport the device in its original packaging only.
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. → Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a
lashing strip.
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured 1.11 Storage
adequately.
; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
ineffective protective device.
packaging in a clean environment.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
Translation of the original operating instructions

with open- and closed-loop control devices. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
shielding measures have to be taken by the user. service life.
; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
NOTE
described prior to commissioning.
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment. ; Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
1.7 Mechanical movement
DANGER
Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
the impeller.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.

252

Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 2 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
● Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/
TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems.
● The device is to be used in networks with network quality
characteristics as per EN 50160.
● Use of the device in stationary systems only.
● Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
● Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
● Operating the device with all protective devices.
● Following the operating instructions.

Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
● Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
● Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
● Opening the terminal box during operation.
● Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
● Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
● Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
● Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
● Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
● Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
Translation of the original operating instructions

functions.
● Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
● In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.

253

Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 3 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3. TECHNICAL DATA

3.1 Product drawing

All dimensions in mm.

1 Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L1
1.3 L2
1.4 L3
Translation of the original operating instructions

1.5 NC
1.6 COM
1.7 GND
1.8 0-10 V
1.9 +10 V
2 Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3 Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm

254

Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 4 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description

Motor M3G084-DF Weight 11.8 kg
Fan size 250 mm
Phase 3~ Rotor surface Painted black
Nominal voltage / VAC 400 Electronics housing Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Nominal voltage 380 .. 480 material
range / VAC Impeller material PA plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Frequency / Hz 50/60 Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Method of obtaining ml Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
data Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2900 Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
Power consumption / W 240 plastic (RAL 9005)
Current draw / A 0.44 Number of blades 7
Min. ambient -25 Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
temperature / °C Degree of protection IP55
Max. ambient 60 Insulation class "F"
temperature / °C Moisture (F) / H1
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air Environmental (H)
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment protection class
Subject to change Installation position Any
Condensation None
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ drainage holes
2011 Mode S1
Actual Req. 2015 Motor bearing Ball bearing
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 46.9 43.9 Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
02 Measurement category A - Operation and alarm display
- External 24 V input (parameter setting)
03 Efficiency category Static
- Alarm relay
04 Efficiency grade N 64.1 61
- Integrated PID controller
05 Variable speed drive Yes
- Motor current limitation
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label. - PFC, passive
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart - Soft start
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
- EEPROM write cycles: 100,000
maximum
08 Type K3G250-RR03-M4
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.23
- Control interface with SELV potential
09 Air flow qv / m³/h 700
safely disconnected from the mains
09 Pressure increase total psf / 500 - Thermal overload protection for
Pa electronics/motor
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2920 - Line undervoltage / phase failure
Translation of the original operating instructions

11 Specific ratio* 1.01 detection

12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
Touch current <= 3.5 mA
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and according to IEC
maintenance is provided in the operating 60990 (measuring
instructions. circuit Fig. 4, TN
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
system)
measurement category are detailed in the Electrical hookup Via terminal box
CE declaration. Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
* Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa internally connected
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
combination in a standardized measurement setup. customer to the housing's connection point)
Conformity with EN 61800-5-1; CE
standards
Approval C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1;
EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730

255

Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 5 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for 4.1 Mechanical connection
support.
; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
Information on surface quality from packaging
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial → Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional → Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over CAUTION
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the Heavy load when unpacking device
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in → Two people should work together to remove the device from
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. its packaging.

3.5 Mounting data NOTE

Damage to the device from vibration
; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self- Bearing damage, shorter service life
locking screws). → The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
Strength class of 8.8 from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
screws ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. attachment of the fan to the substructure.
; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
3.6 Transport and storage conditions transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
Max. permitted +80 °C
; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
ambient temp. for
be installed.
motor (transport/
storage) ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
Min. permitted -40 °C CAUTION
ambient temp. for Possible damage to the device
motor (transport/ If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
storage)
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
● The fan must not be strained on fastening.
EMC immunity to According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
interference environment) 4.2 Electrical connection
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference According to EN 61000-6-3 (household DANGER
Voltage on the device
Translation of the original operating instructions

emission environment)
Electric shock
If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side → Always connect a protective earth first.
so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 16-
→ Check the protective earth.
75 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12
provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point DANGER
of the customer system to the public power system is greater Faulty insulation
than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/ → Use only cables that meet the specified installation
owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
with the network operator, that this device is only connected to etc.
a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
rotating parts.

256

Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 6 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

DANGER 4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses

Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line
protective earth connection after switching off supply
protection only, no equipment protection).
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury Nominal Fuse Automatic Cable Cable
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. voltage circuit cross- cross-
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply breaker section section
and PE connections. VDE UL VDE mm² *AWG
3/PE AC 16 A 15 A C16A 1.5 16
CAUTION 380-480
Voltage VAC
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch.
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with * AWG = American Wire Gauge
an all-pole disconnection switch. 4.2.3 Reactive currents
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
switched back on. limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
NOTE when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
Device malfunctions possible on.
Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line.
● The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
→ Maintain the greatest possible clearance.
● At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable
(operational readiness) is typically < 5 W.
routing)
NOTE 4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
Water ingress into wires or cables
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
device.
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
environment. while operating the device. When the device power supply is
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
an all-pole disconnection switch. integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
4.2.1 Requirements delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data. 4.2.5 Leakage current
; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the
the device voltage. leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value.
; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate. 4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection
Translation of the original operating instructions

For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according

to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least 4.3 Connection in terminal box
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².

Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection

Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5- Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra NOTE
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth used.
symbol and a hole.
→ This must be checked by the user.

257

Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 7 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals

WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
; Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
; First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
; Seal the terminal box.

4.3.3 Cable routing

Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.

4.4 Factory settings

Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 5
Translation of the original operating instructions

Save set value to Yes

EEPROM
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 1
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 2

258

Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 8 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.5 Connection diagram

Drawing preliminary!

No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment

1 1, 2 PE green/ Protective earth
yellow
1 3 L1 black Power supply
1 4 L2 black Power supply
1 5 L3 black Power supply
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
Translation of the original operating instructions

insulation on control interface side

2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value), 0-10 V, Ri = 100 kΩ, adjustable curve, SELV
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV
2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV
2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot), SELV
fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply

259

Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 9 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.6 Checking connections 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES

; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
; Make sure a restart is impossible automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
; Check the cables for proper fit. Fault Safety feature description/
; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening function
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover Blocked rotor ; After the blockage is
closes without resistance. removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
Line undervoltage (line voltage ; If the line voltage returns to
the threads.
outside of permitted nominal permitted values, the motor
; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that voltage range) restarts automatically.
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened. Phase failure A phase of the supply voltage
fails for at least 5 s.
4.7 Switching on the device ; When all phases are
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and correctly supplied again, the
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety motor automatically restarts after
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for 10-40 s.
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
Hot motor housing
Risk of fire
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
located close to the fan. papst for repair or replacement.
; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage WARNING
and make sure the protective devices are functional. Live terminals and connections even with device
; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any switched off
foreign matter found. Electric shock
; Apply the nominal supply voltage. → Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
; Start the device by changing the input signal.
CAUTION
NOTE
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
Damage to the device from vibration
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
Bearing damage, shorter service life
failure.
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the Risk of injury
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
cannot be switched back on.
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
Translation of the original operating instructions

levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be → Wait until the device comes to a stop.
determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run → After working on the device, remove any tools or other
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with objects from the device.
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
failure.
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
4.8 Switching off the device Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Switching off the device during operation: Impeller not Imbalance in rotating Clean the device;
running smoothly parts replace it if imbalance
; Switch off the device via the control input. persists after cleaning.
; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power Make sure no
supply. weight clips are
Switching off the device for maintenance: removed during
; Switch off the device via the control input. cleaning.
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
from supply and
supply.
remove mechanical
; Disconnect the device from the power supply. blockage.
;260
When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.

Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 10 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

Line voltage faulty Check line voltage, In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
restore power supply.
Attention! The error
message resets
6.1 Vibration testing
automatically.
Device restarts Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
automatically without Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
warning. s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
Faulty connection Isolate from supply, the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
correct connection;
see connection
diagram.
Broken motor winding Replace device
Thermal overload Allow motor to cool
protector activated off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary
Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let
the device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of
applying a control the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation
signal of < 0.5 V to situation.
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND. 6.2 Cleaning
Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient
too high temperature. Let the NOTE
device cool down. Damage to the device during cleaning
To reset the error Malfunction possible
message, switch off → Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
the line voltage for at → Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
least 25 s and then
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset 6.3 Safety inspection
the error message by
applying a control NOTE
signal of < 0.5 V to High-voltage test
Translation of the original operating instructions

Din1 or by shorting The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
Din1 to GND. is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
Impermissible point of Correct the operating → Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
operation (e.g. back point. Let the device legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
pressure too high) cool down. corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
To reset the error the standard.
message, switch off
the line voltage for at What to check How to check How often What action?
least 25 s and then Contact Visual inspection At least every Repair or
switch it on again. protection 6 months replacement of
Alternatively, reset cover for device
the error message by intactness or
applying a control damage
signal of < 0.5 V to Device for Visual inspection At least every Replacement of
Din1 or by shorting damage to 6 months device
Din1 to GND. blades and
housing
Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten
cables 6 months
261

Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 11 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
protective earth 6 months rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
terminal ; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
Insulation of Visual inspection At least every Replace cables and steel.
cables for 6 months
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
damage
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
Impeller for Visual inspection At least every Clean or manner.
wear/deposits/ 6 months replace impeller The materials concerned are as follows:
corrosion and
damage ● Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
Tightness of Visual inspection At least every Retighten, ● Power cables
cable gland 6 months replace if ● Cables for internal wiring
damaged ● Electrolytic capacitors
Abnormal acoustic At least every Replace device
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
bearing noise 6 months
electronic scrap.
6.4 Disposal → Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
top priority corporate goals.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.

6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Translation of the original operating instructions

Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the

product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.

6.4.3 Component disposal

The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
● Steel and iron
● Aluminum
● Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
● Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
● Insulating materials
● Cables and wires
● Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
262

Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 12 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
D.8 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction,
SK225

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 263
Additional documents
D.8 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK225

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

264 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION

Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 danger to persons.
[email protected] These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
www.ebmpapst.com The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
CONTENTS These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1
1.2 Staff qualifications 1 These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
1.3 Basic safety rules 1 potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
1.4 Voltage 1
DANGER
1.5 Safety and protective features 2
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 2
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
1.7 Mechanical movement 2
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
1.8 Emissions 2
1.9 Hot surface 2 WARNING
1.10 Transport 2 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
1.11 Storage 2 death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
2. INTENDED USE 3
CAUTION
3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
3.1 Product drawing 4 minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
3.2 Nominal data 5 actions are not taken.
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 5 NOTE
3.4 Technical description 5 A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
3.5 Mounting data 6 lead to property damage.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions 6
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 6 1.2 Staff qualifications
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
4.1 Mechanical connection 6 maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
4.2 Electrical connection 6 authorized technical staff.
4.3 Connection in terminal box 7 Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
4.4 Factory settings 8 out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
4.5 Connection diagram 9
1.3 Basic safety rules
4.6 Checking connections 10
4.7 Switching on the device 10 The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
4.8 Switching off the device 10 following installation in the final product.
The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be
Translation of the original operating instructions

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 observed when working on the device.

Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE 11 increases the risk of accidents.
CAUSES AND REMEDIES Note the following when working on the device:
6.1 Vibration testing 11
; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
6.2 Cleaning 12
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
6.3 Safety inspection 12
6.4 Disposal 12 1.4 Voltage
; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.

265

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 1 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

WARNING 1.7 Mechanical movement

Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off DANGER
Electric shock Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
the impeller.
before opening the device.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
CAUTION
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
parts have come to a standstill.
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. WARNING
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
CAUTION can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, can result.
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
failure.
while working on rotating parts.
Risk of injury
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it 1.8 Emissions
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop. WARNING
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
objects from the device. the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
1.5 Safety and protective features → Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
DANGER
equipment such as hearing protection.
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning → Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation. 1.9 Hot surface
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and CAUTION
guard grille. High temperature on electronics housing
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the Risk of burns
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at → Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. 1.10 Transport
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you WARNING
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured Transporting the fan
adequately. Injuries from tipping or slipping
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or → The fan is always to be transported with care and in its
Translation of the original operating instructions

ineffective protective device. original packaging. #If set down too hard or at an angle for
example, the impact can lead to bearing damage or
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
deformation of the frame or impeller. #It must be ensured that
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction the fans cannot tip over during transportation and handling.
with open- and closed-loop control devices. → Secure the fan(s) with appropriate equipment such as a
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate lashing strip so that nothing can slip or tip, especially when
shielding measures have to be taken by the user. stacking multiple fans. #Also make allowance for possible
NOTE wind forces.
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment. 1.11 Storage
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
packaging in a clean environment.
; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
service life.
266

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 2 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as

described prior to commissioning.
; Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.

2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
● Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/
TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems.
● The device is to be used in networks with network quality
characteristics as per EN 50160.
● Use of the device in stationary systems only.
● Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
● Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
● Operating the device with all protective devices.
● Following the operating instructions.

Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
● Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
● Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
● Opening the terminal box during operation.
● Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
Translation of the original operating instructions

● Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices

designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
● Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
● Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
● Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
● Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
● Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
● In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.

267

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 3 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3. TECHNICAL DATA

3.1 Product drawing

All dimensions in mm.

1 Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L1
1.3 L2
1.4 L3
Translation of the original operating instructions

1.5 NC
1.6 COM
1.7 GND
1.8 0-10 V
1.9 +10 V
2 Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3 Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm

268

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 4 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description

Motor M3G084-DF Weight 18.0 kg
Fan size 280 mm
Phase 3~ Rotor surface Painted black
Nominal voltage / VAC 400 Electronics housing Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Nominal voltage 380 .. 480 material
range / VAC Impeller material PP plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Frequency / Hz 50/60 Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Method of obtaining ml Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
data Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2550 Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
Power consumption / W 450 plastic (RAL 9005)
Current draw / A 0.75 Number of blades 6
Min. ambient -25 Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
temperature / °C Degree of protection IP55
Max. ambient 60 Insulation class "F"
temperature / °C Moisture (F) / H1
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air Environmental (H)
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment protection class
Subject to change Installation position Any
Condensation None
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ drainage holes
2011 Mode S1
Actual Req. 2015 Motor bearing Ball bearing
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 56.9 46.5 Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
02 Measurement category A - Operation and alarm display
- External 24 V input (parameter setting)
03 Efficiency category Static
- Alarm relay
04 Efficiency grade N 71.4 61
- Integrated PID controller
05 Variable speed drive Yes
- Motor current limitation
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label. - PFC, passive
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart - Soft start
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
- EEPROM write cycles: 100,000
maximum
08 Type K3G280-RR03-M4
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.42
- Control interface with SELV potential
09 Air flow qv / m³/h 1400
safely disconnected from the mains
09 Pressure increase total psf / 557 - Thermal overload protection for
Pa electronics/motor
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2555 - Line undervoltage / phase failure
Translation of the original operating instructions

11 Specific ratio* 1.01 detection

12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
Touch current <= 3.5 mA
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and according to IEC
maintenance is provided in the operating 60990 (measuring
instructions. circuit Fig. 4, TN
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
system)
measurement category are detailed in the Electrical hookup Via terminal box
CE declaration. Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
* Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa internally connected
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
combination in a standardized measurement setup. customer to the housing's connection point)
Conformity with EN 61800-5-1; CE
standards
Approval C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1;
EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730

269

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 5 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for 4.1 Mechanical connection
support.
; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
Information on surface quality from packaging
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial → Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional → Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over CAUTION
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the Heavy load when unpacking device
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in → Two people should work together to remove the device from
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. its packaging.

3.5 Mounting data NOTE

Damage to the device from vibration
Strength class of 8.8 Bearing damage, shorter service life
screws → The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self- from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
locking screws). ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. attachment of the fan to the substructure.
; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
3.6 Transport and storage conditions transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
Max. permitted +80 °C
; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
ambient temp. for
be installed.
motor (transport/
storage) ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
Min. permitted -40 °C CAUTION
ambient temp. for Possible damage to the device
motor (transport/ If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
storage)
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
● The fan must not be strained on fastening.
EMC immunity to According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
interference environment) 4.2 Electrical connection
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference According to EN 61000-6-3 (household DANGER
Voltage on the device
Translation of the original operating instructions

emission environment)
Electric shock
If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side → Always connect a protective earth first.
so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 16-
→ Check the protective earth.
75 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12
provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point DANGER
of the customer system to the public power system is greater Faulty insulation
than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/ → Use only cables that meet the specified installation
owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
with the network operator, that this device is only connected to etc.
a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
rotating parts.

270

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 6 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

DANGER 4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses

Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line
protective earth connection after switching off supply
protection only, no equipment protection).
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury Nominal Fuse Automatic Cable Cable
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. voltage circuit cross- cross-
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply breaker section section
and PE connections. VDE UL VDE mm² *AWG
3/PE AC 16 A 15 A C16A 1.5 16
CAUTION 380-480
Voltage VAC
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch.
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with * AWG = American Wire Gauge
an all-pole disconnection switch. 4.2.3 Reactive currents
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
switched back on. limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
NOTE when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
Device malfunctions possible on.
Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line.
● The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
→ Maintain the greatest possible clearance.
● At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable
(operational readiness) is typically < 5 W.
routing)
NOTE 4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
Water ingress into wires or cables
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
device.
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
environment. while operating the device. When the device power supply is
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
an all-pole disconnection switch. integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
4.2.1 Requirements delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data. 4.2.5 Leakage current
; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the
the device voltage. leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value.
; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate. 4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection
Translation of the original operating instructions

For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according

to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least 4.3 Connection in terminal box
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².

Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection

Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5- Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra NOTE
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth used.
symbol and a hole.
→ This must be checked by the user.

271

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 7 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals

WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
; Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
; First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
; Seal the terminal box.

4.3.3 Cable routing

Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.

4.4 Factory settings

Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 5
Translation of the original operating instructions

Save set value to Yes

EEPROM
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 1
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 2

272

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 8 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.5 Connection diagram

Drawing preliminary!

No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment

1 1, 2 PE green/ Protective earth
yellow
1 3 L1 black Power supply
1 4 L2 black Power supply
1 5 L3 black Power supply
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
Translation of the original operating instructions

insulation on control interface side

2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value), 0-10 V, Ri = 100 kΩ, adjustable curve, SELV
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV
2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV
2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot), SELV
fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply

273

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 9 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.6 Checking connections 4.8 Switching off the device

; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). Switching off the device during operation:
; Make sure a restart is impossible ; Switch off the device via the control input.
; Check the cables for proper fit. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening supply.
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. Switching off the device for maintenance:
; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover ; Switch off the device via the control input.
closes without resistance. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to supply.
the threads. ; Disconnect the device from the power supply.
; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that ; When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.

4.7 Switching on the device

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or Fault Safety feature description/
similar connectors by the customer. function
WARNING Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Hot motor housing Blocked rotor ; After the blockage is
Risk of fire removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the fan. Line undervoltage (line voltage ; If the line voltage returns to
outside of permitted nominal permitted values, the motor
; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage voltage range) restarts automatically.
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
Phase failure A phase of the supply voltage
; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any fails for at least 5 s.
foreign matter found. ; When all phases are
; Apply the nominal supply voltage. correctly supplied again, the
; Start the device by changing the input signal. motor automatically restarts after
10-40 s.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
Translation of the original operating instructions

levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be

determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
failure.

→ The maximum permissible vibration severity must not

exceed 3.5 mm/s and should be checked at intervals of 6
months. #It is to be measured at the motor mount at the
motor support plate in all three 3 dimensions, see Chapter 6.
Maintenance, malfunctions, possible causes and remedies.

274

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 10 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let

the device cool down.
CAUSES AND REMEDIES To reset the error
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm- message, switch off
papst for repair or replacement. the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
WARNING switch it on again.
Live terminals and connections even with device Alternatively, reset
switched off the error message by
Electric shock applying a control
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles signal of < 0.5 V to
before opening the device. Din1 or by shorting
CAUTION Din1 to GND.
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power too high temperature. Let the
failure. device cool down.
Risk of injury To reset the error
message, switch off
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the line voltage for at
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
least 25 s and then
cannot be switched back on.
switch it on again.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop. Alternatively, reset
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other the error message by
objects from the device. applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage, Din1 or by shorting
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow Din1 to GND.
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Impermissible point of Correct the operating
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy operation (e.g. back point. Let the device
Impeller not Imbalance in rotating Clean the device; pressure too high) cool down.
running smoothly parts replace it if imbalance To reset the error
persists after cleaning. message, switch off
Make sure no the line voltage for at
weight clips are least 25 s and then
removed during switch it on again.
cleaning. Alternatively, reset
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate the error message by
from supply and applying a control
remove mechanical signal of < 0.5 V to
blockage. Din1 or by shorting
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage, Din1 to GND.
restore power supply.
Attention! The error In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
Translation of the original operating instructions

message resets
automatically.
Device restarts 6.1 Vibration testing
automatically without
warning. Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
Faulty connection Isolate from supply,
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
correct connection;
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
see connection
diagram.
Broken motor winding Replace device
Thermal overload Allow motor to cool
protector activated off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary

275

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 11 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

Impeller for Visual inspection At least every Clean impeller

wear/deposits/ 6 months or replace device
corrosion and
damage
Tightness of Visual inspection At least every Retighten,
cable gland 6 months replace if
damaged
Abnormal acoustic At least every Replace device
bearing noise 6 months
Vibration test Vibration tester, Recommended Clean impeller
start-up or every 6 months or replace device
deceleration
measurement

6.4 Disposal
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of top priority corporate goals.
the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
situation.
around the world on the basis of German standards.
6.2 Cleaning Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
NOTE The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
Damage to the device during cleaning of the product and its components.
Malfunction possible 6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
→ Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
NOTE
→ Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
Country-specific legal requirements
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
6.3 Safety inspection occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
NOTE corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.
High-voltage test
6.4.2 Disassembly
The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied. Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
→ Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by employing standard procedures for motors.
the standard. WARNING
What to check How to check How often What action? Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
Contact Visual inspection At least every Repair or
Translation of the original operating instructions

could drop off during disassembly.

protection 6 months replacement of
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
cover for device
intactness or → Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.
damage
6.4.3 Component disposal
Device for Visual inspection At least every Replacement of
damage to 6 months device The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
blades and Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
housing Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten ● Steel and iron
cables 6 months ● Aluminum
Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten
protective earth 6 months ● Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
terminal ● Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
Insulation of Visual inspection At least every Replace cables with marking
cables for 6 months ● Insulating materials
damage ● Cables and wires
● Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards

276

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 12 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
● Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
● Power cables
● Cables for internal wiring
● Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.

→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.

Translation of the original operating instructions

277

Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 13 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
278
D.9 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing,
SH180

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 279
Additional documents
D.9 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

280 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION

Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 danger to persons.
[email protected] These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
www.ebmpapst.com The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
CONTENTS These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1
1.2 Staff qualifications 1 These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
1.3 Basic safety rules 1 potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
1.4 Voltage 1
DANGER
1.5 Safety and protective features 2
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 2
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
1.7 Mechanical movement 2
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
1.8 Emissions 2
1.9 Hot surface 2 WARNING
1.10 Transport 2 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
1.11 Storage 2 death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
2. INTENDED USE 3
CAUTION
3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
3.1 Product drawing 4 minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
3.2 Nominal data 5 actions are not taken.
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 5 NOTE
3.4 Technical description 5 A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
3.5 Mounting data 6 lead to property damage.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions 6
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 6 1.2 Staff qualifications
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
4.1 Mechanical connection 6 maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
4.2 Electrical connection 6 authorized technical staff.
4.3 Connection in terminal box 7 Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
4.4 Factory settings 8 out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
4.5 Connection diagram 9
1.3 Basic safety rules
4.6 Checking connections 10
4.7 Switching on the device 10 The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
4.8 Switching off the device 10 following installation in the final product.
Note the following when working on the device:
Translation of the original operating instructions

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE 10
CAUSES AND REMEDIES 1.4 Voltage
6.1 Vibration testing 11
6.2 Cleaning 11 ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
6.3 Safety inspection 11 Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
6.4 Disposal 12 ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock

281

Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 1 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles WARNING
before opening the device. Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
CAUTION
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
can result.
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. → Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, 1.8 Emissions
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure. WARNING
Risk of injury Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on. → Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop. → Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device. → Also observe the requirements of local agencies.

1.5 Safety and protective features 1.9 Hot surface

DANGER CAUTION
Protective device missing and protective device not High temperature on electronics housing
functioning Risk of burns
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for → Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and 1.10 Transport
guard grille. NOTE
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the Transporting the device
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at → Transport the device in its original packaging only.
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. → Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a
lashing strip.
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured 1.11 Storage
adequately.
; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
ineffective protective device.
packaging in a clean environment.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
Translation of the original operating instructions

with open- and closed-loop control devices. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
shielding measures have to be taken by the user. service life.
; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
NOTE
described prior to commissioning.
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment. ; Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
1.7 Mechanical movement
DANGER
Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
the impeller.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.

282

Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 2 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
● Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/
TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems.
● The device is to be used in networks with network quality
characteristics as per EN 50160.
● Use of the device in stationary systems only.
● Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
● Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
● Operating the device with all protective devices.
● Following the operating instructions.

Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
● Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
● Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
● Opening the terminal box during operation.
● Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
● Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
● Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
● Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
● Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
● Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
Translation of the original operating instructions

functions.
● Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
● In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.

283

Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 3 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3. TECHNICAL DATA

3.1 Product drawing

All dimensions in mm.

1 Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L1
1.3 L2
1.4 L3
Translation of the original operating instructions

1.5 NC
1.6 COM
1.7 GND
1.8 0-10 V
1.9 +10 V
2 Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3 Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Accessory part: Guard grill 20180-2-4039, filter 99950-2-5170 and filter mount 25180-2-4041 not included in scope of delivery.

284

Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 4 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description

Motor M3G084-DF Weight 11.8 kg
Fan size 250 mm
Phase 3~ Rotor surface Painted black
Nominal voltage / VAC 400 Electronics housing Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Nominal voltage 380 .. 480 material
range / VAC Impeller material PA plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Frequency / Hz 50/60 Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Method of obtaining ml Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
data Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Speed (rpm) / min-1 3100 Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
Power consumption / W 300 plastic (RAL 9005)
Current draw / A 0.5 Number of blades 7
Min. ambient -25 Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
temperature / °C Degree of protection IP55
Max. ambient 60 Insulation class "F"
temperature / °C Moisture (F) / H1
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air Environmental (H)
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment protection class
Subject to change Installation position Any
Condensation None
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ drainage holes
2011 Mode S1
Actual Req. 2015 Motor bearing Ball bearing
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 48.9 44.9 Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
02 Measurement category A - Operation and alarm display
- External 24 V input (parameter setting)
03 Efficiency category Static
- Alarm relay
04 Efficiency grade N 65 61
- Integrated PID controller
05 Variable speed drive Yes
- Motor current limitation
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label. - PFC, passive
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart - Soft start
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
- EEPROM write cycles: 100,000
maximum
08 Type K3G250-RR17-M9
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.29
- Control interface with SELV potential
09 Air flow qv / m³/h 905
safely disconnected from the mains
09 Pressure increase total psf / 511 - Thermal overload protection for
Pa electronics/motor
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 3105 - Line undervoltage / phase failure
Translation of the original operating instructions

11 Specific ratio* 1.01 detection

12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
Touch current <= 3.5 mA
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and according to IEC
maintenance is provided in the operating 60990 (measuring
instructions. circuit Fig. 4, TN
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
system)
measurement category are detailed in the Electrical hookup Via terminal box
CE declaration. Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
* Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa internally connected
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
combination in a standardized measurement setup. customer to the housing's connection point)
Conformity with EN 61800-5-1; CE
standards
Approval UL 1004-7 + 60730; C22.2 No.77 +
CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC
Comment Operational is only permitted with the
optional guard grill available from ebm-
papst.

285

Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 5 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for 4.1 Mechanical connection
support.
; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
Information on surface quality from packaging
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial → Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional → Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over CAUTION
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the Heavy load when unpacking device
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in → Two people should work together to remove the device from
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. its packaging.

3.5 Mounting data NOTE

Damage to the device from vibration
; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self- Bearing damage, shorter service life
locking screws). → The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
Strength class of 8.8 from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
screws ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. attachment of the fan to the substructure.
; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
3.6 Transport and storage conditions transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
Max. permitted +80 °C
; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
ambient temp. for
be installed.
motor (transport/
storage) ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
Min. permitted -40 °C CAUTION
ambient temp. for Possible damage to the device
motor (transport/ If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
storage)
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
● The fan must not be strained on fastening.
EMC immunity to According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
interference environment) 4.2 Electrical connection
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference According to EN 61000-6-3 (household DANGER
Voltage on the device
Translation of the original operating instructions

emission environment)
Electric shock
If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side → Always connect a protective earth first.
so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 16-
→ Check the protective earth.
75 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12
provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point DANGER
of the customer system to the public power system is greater Faulty insulation
than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/ → Use only cables that meet the specified installation
owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
with the network operator, that this device is only connected to etc.
a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
rotating parts.

286

Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 6 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

DANGER 4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses

Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line
protective earth connection after switching off supply
protection only, no equipment protection).
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury Nominal Fuse Automatic Cable Cable
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. voltage circuit cross- cross-
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply breaker section section
and PE connections. VDE UL VDE mm² *AWG
3/PE AC 16 A 15 A C16A 1.5 16
CAUTION 380-480
Voltage VAC
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch.
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with * AWG = American Wire Gauge
an all-pole disconnection switch. 4.2.3 Reactive currents
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
switched back on. limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
NOTE when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
Device malfunctions possible on.
Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line.
● The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
→ Maintain the greatest possible clearance.
● At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable
(operational readiness) is typically < 5 W.
routing)
NOTE 4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
Water ingress into wires or cables
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
device.
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
environment. while operating the device. When the device power supply is
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
an all-pole disconnection switch. integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
4.2.1 Requirements delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data. 4.2.5 Leakage current
; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the
the device voltage. leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value.
; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate. 4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection
Translation of the original operating instructions

For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according

to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least 4.3 Connection in terminal box
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².

Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection

Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5- Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra NOTE
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth used.
symbol and a hole.
→ This must be checked by the user.

287

Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 7 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals

WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
; Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
; First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
; Seal the terminal box.

4.3.3 Cable routing

Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.

4.4 Factory settings

Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 5
Translation of the original operating instructions

Save set value to Yes

EEPROM
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 1
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 2

288

Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 8 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.5 Connection diagram

Drawing preliminary!

No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment

1 1, 2 PE green/ Protective earth
yellow
1 3 L1 black Power supply
1 4 L2 black Power supply
1 5 L3 black Power supply
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
Translation of the original operating instructions

insulation on control interface side

2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value), 0-10 V, Ri = 100 kΩ, adjustable curve, SELV
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV
2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV
2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot), SELV
fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply

289

Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 9 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.6 Checking connections 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES

; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
; Make sure a restart is impossible automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
; Check the cables for proper fit. Fault Safety feature description/
; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening function
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover Blocked rotor ; After the blockage is
closes without resistance. removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
Line undervoltage (line voltage ; If the line voltage returns to
the threads.
outside of permitted nominal permitted values, the motor
; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that voltage range) restarts automatically.
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened. Phase failure A phase of the supply voltage
fails for at least 5 s.
4.7 Switching on the device ; When all phases are
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and correctly supplied again, the
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety motor automatically restarts after
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for 10-40 s.
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
Hot motor housing
Risk of fire
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
located close to the fan. papst for repair or replacement.
; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage WARNING
and make sure the protective devices are functional. Live terminals and connections even with device
; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any switched off
foreign matter found. Electric shock
; Apply the nominal supply voltage. → Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
; Start the device by changing the input signal.
CAUTION
NOTE
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
Damage to the device from vibration
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
Bearing damage, shorter service life
failure.
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the Risk of injury
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
cannot be switched back on.
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
Translation of the original operating instructions

levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be → Wait until the device comes to a stop.
determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run → After working on the device, remove any tools or other
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with objects from the device.
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
failure.
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
4.8 Switching off the device Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Switching off the device during operation: Impeller not Imbalance in rotating Clean the device;
running smoothly parts replace it if imbalance
; Switch off the device via the control input. persists after cleaning.
; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power Make sure no
supply. weight clips are
Switching off the device for maintenance: removed during
; Switch off the device via the control input. cleaning.
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
from supply and
supply.
remove mechanical
; Disconnect the device from the power supply. blockage.
;290
When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.

Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 10 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

Line voltage faulty Check line voltage, In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
restore power supply.
Attention! The error
message resets
6.1 Vibration testing
automatically.
Device restarts Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
automatically without Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
warning. s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
Faulty connection Isolate from supply, the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
correct connection;
see connection
diagram.
Broken motor winding Replace device
Thermal overload Allow motor to cool
protector activated off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary
Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let
the device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of
applying a control the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation
signal of < 0.5 V to situation.
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND. 6.2 Cleaning
Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient
too high temperature. Let the NOTE
device cool down. Damage to the device during cleaning
To reset the error Malfunction possible
message, switch off → Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
the line voltage for at → Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
least 25 s and then
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset 6.3 Safety inspection
the error message by
applying a control NOTE
signal of < 0.5 V to High-voltage test
Translation of the original operating instructions

Din1 or by shorting The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
Din1 to GND. is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
Impermissible point of Correct the operating → Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
operation (e.g. back point. Let the device legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
pressure too high) cool down. corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
To reset the error the standard.
message, switch off
the line voltage for at What to check How to check How often What action?
least 25 s and then Contact Visual inspection At least every Repair or
switch it on again. protection 6 months replacement of
Alternatively, reset cover for device
the error message by intactness or
applying a control damage
signal of < 0.5 V to Device for Visual inspection At least every Replacement of
Din1 or by shorting damage to 6 months device
Din1 to GND. blades and
housing
Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten
cables 6 months
291

Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 11 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
protective earth 6 months rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
terminal ; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
Insulation of Visual inspection At least every Replace cables and steel.
cables for 6 months
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
damage
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
Impeller for Visual inspection At least every Clean or manner.
wear/deposits/ 6 months replace impeller The materials concerned are as follows:
corrosion and
damage ● Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
Tightness of Visual inspection At least every Retighten, ● Power cables
cable gland 6 months replace if ● Cables for internal wiring
damaged ● Electrolytic capacitors
Abnormal acoustic At least every Replace device
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
bearing noise 6 months
electronic scrap.
6.4 Disposal → Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
top priority corporate goals.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.

6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Translation of the original operating instructions

Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the

product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.

6.4.3 Component disposal

The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
● Steel and iron
● Aluminum
● Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
● Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
● Insulating materials
● Cables and wires
● Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
292

Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 12 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
D.10 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing,
SH225

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 293
Additional documents
D.10 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

294 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION

Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 danger to persons.
[email protected] These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
www.ebmpapst.com The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
CONTENTS These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1
1.2 Staff qualifications 1 These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
1.3 Basic safety rules 1 potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
1.4 Voltage 1
DANGER
1.5 Safety and protective features 2
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 2
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
1.7 Mechanical movement 2
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
1.8 Emissions 2
1.9 Hot surface 2 WARNING
1.10 Transport 2 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
1.11 Storage 2 death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
2. INTENDED USE 3
CAUTION
3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
3.1 Product drawing 4 minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
3.2 Nominal data 5 actions are not taken.
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 5 NOTE
3.4 Technical description 5 A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
3.5 Mounting data 6 lead to property damage.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions 6
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 6 1.2 Staff qualifications
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
4.1 Mechanical connection 6 maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
4.2 Electrical connection 6 authorized technical staff.
4.3 Connection in terminal box 7 Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
4.4 Factory settings 8 out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
4.5 Connection diagram 9
1.3 Basic safety rules
4.6 Checking connections 10
4.7 Switching on the device 10 The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
4.8 Switching off the device 10 following installation in the final product.
Note the following when working on the device:
Translation of the original operating instructions

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE 11
CAUSES AND REMEDIES 1.4 Voltage
6.1 Vibration testing 11
6.2 Cleaning 12 ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
6.3 Safety inspection 12 Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
6.4 Disposal 12 ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock

295

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 1 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles WARNING
before opening the device. Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
CAUTION
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
can result.
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. → Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, 1.8 Emissions
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure. WARNING
Risk of injury Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on. → Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop. → Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device. → Also observe the requirements of local agencies.

1.5 Safety and protective features 1.9 Hot surface

DANGER CAUTION
Protective device missing and protective device not High temperature on electronics housing
functioning Risk of burns
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for → Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and 1.10 Transport
guard grille. WARNING
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the Transporting the fan
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at Injuries from tipping or slipping
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is → The fan is always to be transported with care and in its
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. original packaging. #If set down too hard or at an angle for
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you example, the impact can lead to bearing damage or
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured deformation of the frame or impeller. #It must be ensured that
adequately. the fans cannot tip over during transportation and handling.
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or → Secure the fan(s) with appropriate equipment such as a
ineffective protective device. lashing strip so that nothing can slip or tip, especially when
stacking multiple fans. #Also make allowance for possible
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation wind forces.
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
Translation of the original operating instructions

with open- and closed-loop control devices. 1.11 Storage

If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
shielding measures have to be taken by the user. protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
NOTE packaging in a clean environment.
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
the device in customer equipment. installation.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
1.7 Mechanical movement service life.
DANGER ; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
Rotating device described prior to commissioning.
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or ; Maintain the storage temperature, see
the impeller. Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact. ; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.

296

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 2 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
● Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/
TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems.
● The device is to be used in networks with network quality
characteristics as per EN 50160.
● Use of the device in stationary systems only.
● Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
● Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
● Operating the device with all protective devices.
● Following the operating instructions.

Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
● Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
● Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
● Opening the terminal box during operation.
● Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
● Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
● Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
● Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
● Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
● Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
Translation of the original operating instructions

functions.
● Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
● In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.

297

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 3 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3. TECHNICAL DATA

3.1 Product drawing

All dimensions in mm.

1 Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L1
1.3 L2
1.4 L3
Translation of the original operating instructions

1.5 NC
1.6 COM
1.7 GND
1.8 0-10 V
1.9 +10 V
2 Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3 Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Accessory part: Guard grill 20225-2-4039, filter 99951-2-5170 and filter mount 25225-2-4041 not included in scope of delivery.

298

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 4 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description

Motor M3G084-DF Weight 17.5 kg
Fan size 280 mm
Phase 3~ Rotor surface Painted black
Nominal voltage / VAC 400 Electronics housing Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Nominal voltage 380 .. 480 material
range / VAC Impeller material PP plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Frequency / Hz 50/60 Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Method of obtaining ml Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
data Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Status prelim. Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2700 plastic (RAL 9005)
Power consumption / W 550 Number of blades 6
Current draw / A 0.9 Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
Min. ambient -25 Degree of protection IP55
temperature / °C Insulation class "F"
Max. ambient 60 Moisture (F) / H1
temperature / °C Environmental (H)
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air protection class
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment Installation position Any
Subject to change Condensation None
drainage holes
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ Mode S1
2011 Motor bearing Ball bearing
Actual Req. 2015 Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 58.4 47.7 - Operation and alarm display
- External 24 V input (parameter setting)
02 Measurement category A
- Alarm relay
03 Efficiency category Static
- Integrated PID controller
04 Efficiency grade N 71.7 61
- Motor current limitation
05 Variable speed drive Yes - PFC, passive
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label. - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG - Soft start
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart - EEPROM write cycles: 100,000
· HRA 590344 maximum
D-74673 Mulfingen
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
08 Type K3G280-RR04-M9
- Control interface with SELV potential
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.54
safely disconnected from the mains
09 Air flow qv / m³/h 1820 - Thermal overload protection for
09 Pressure increase total psf / 573 electronics/motor
Pa - Line undervoltage / phase failure
Translation of the original operating instructions

10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2720 detection

11 Specific ratio* 1.01 Touch current <= 3.5 mA
12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
according to IEC
Information on installation, operation and 60990 (measuring
13 Maintenance
maintenance is provided in the operating circuit Fig. 4, TN
instructions. system)
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
Electrical hookup Via terminal box
measurement category are detailed in the Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
CE declaration. internally connected
* Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller customer to the housing's connection point)
combination in a standardized measurement setup. Conformity with EN 61800-5-1; CE
standards
Approval UL 1004-7 + 60730; C22.2 No.77 +
CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC
Comment Operational is only permitted with the
optional guard grill available from ebm-
papst.

299

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 5 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for 4.1 Mechanical connection
support.
; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
Information on surface quality from packaging
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial → Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional → Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over CAUTION
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the Heavy load when unpacking device
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in → Two people should work together to remove the device from
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. its packaging.

3.5 Mounting data NOTE

Damage to the device from vibration
; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self- Bearing damage, shorter service life
locking screws). → The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
Strength class of 8.8 from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
screws ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. attachment of the fan to the substructure.
; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
3.6 Transport and storage conditions transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
Max. permitted +80 °C
; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
ambient temp. for
be installed.
motor (transport/
storage) ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
Min. permitted -40 °C CAUTION
ambient temp. for Possible damage to the device
motor (transport/ If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
storage)
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
● The fan must not be strained on fastening.
If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side
so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 16- 4.2 Electrical connection
75 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12
provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point DANGER
Voltage on the device
Translation of the original operating instructions

of the customer system to the public power system is greater

than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. Electric shock
It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/ → Always connect a protective earth first.
owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation → Check the protective earth.
with the network operator, that this device is only connected to
a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal DANGER
to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.

300

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 6 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

DANGER 4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses

Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line
protective earth connection after switching off supply
protection only, no equipment protection).
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury Nominal Fuse Automatic Cable Cable
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. voltage circuit cross- cross-
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply breaker section section
and PE connections. VDE UL VDE mm² *AWG
3/PE AC 16 A 15 A C16A 1.5 16
CAUTION 380-480
Voltage VAC
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch.
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with * AWG = American Wire Gauge
an all-pole disconnection switch. 4.2.3 Reactive currents
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
switched back on. limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
NOTE when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
Device malfunctions possible on.
Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line.
● The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
→ Maintain the greatest possible clearance.
● At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable
(operational readiness) is typically < 5 W.
routing)
NOTE 4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
Water ingress into wires or cables
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
device.
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
environment. while operating the device. When the device power supply is
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
an all-pole disconnection switch. integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
4.2.1 Requirements delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data. 4.2.5 Leakage current
; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the
the device voltage. leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value.
; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate. 4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection
Translation of the original operating instructions

For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according

to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least 4.3 Connection in terminal box
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².

Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection

Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5- Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra NOTE
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth used.
symbol and a hole.
→ This must be checked by the user.

301

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 7 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals

WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
; Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
; First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
; Seal the terminal box.

4.3.3 Cable routing

Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.

4.4 Factory settings

Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 5
Translation of the original operating instructions

Save set value to Yes

EEPROM
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 1
Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 2

302

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 8 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.5 Connection diagram

Drawing preliminary!

No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment

1 1, 2 PE green/ Protective earth
yellow
1 3 L1 black Power supply
1 4 L2 black Power supply
1 5 L3 black Power supply
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
Translation of the original operating instructions

insulation on control interface side

2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value), 0-10 V, Ri = 100 kΩ, adjustable curve, SELV
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV
2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV
2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot), SELV
fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply

303

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 9 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

4.6 Checking connections 4.8 Switching off the device

; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). Switching off the device during operation:
; Make sure a restart is impossible ; Switch off the device via the control input.
; Check the cables for proper fit. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening supply.
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. Switching off the device for maintenance:
; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover ; Switch off the device via the control input.
closes without resistance. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to supply.
the threads. ; Disconnect the device from the power supply.
; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that ; When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.

4.7 Switching on the device

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or Fault Safety feature description/
similar connectors by the customer. function
WARNING Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Hot motor housing Blocked rotor ; After the blockage is
Risk of fire removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the fan. Line undervoltage (line voltage ; If the line voltage returns to
outside of permitted nominal permitted values, the motor
; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage voltage range) restarts automatically.
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
Phase failure A phase of the supply voltage
; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any fails for at least 5 s.
foreign matter found. ; When all phases are
; Apply the nominal supply voltage. correctly supplied again, the
; Start the device by changing the input signal. motor automatically restarts after
10-40 s.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
Translation of the original operating instructions

levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be

determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
failure.

→ The maximum permissible vibration severity must not

exceed 3.5 mm/s and should be checked at intervals of 6
months. #It is to be measured at the motor mount at the
motor support plate in all three 3 dimensions, see Chapter 6.
Maintenance, malfunctions, possible causes and remedies.

304

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 10 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let

the device cool down.
CAUSES AND REMEDIES To reset the error
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm- message, switch off
papst for repair or replacement. the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
WARNING switch it on again.
Live terminals and connections even with device Alternatively, reset
switched off the error message by
Electric shock applying a control
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles signal of < 0.5 V to
before opening the device. Din1 or by shorting
CAUTION Din1 to GND.
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power too high temperature. Let the
failure. device cool down.
Risk of injury To reset the error
message, switch off
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the line voltage for at
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
least 25 s and then
cannot be switched back on.
switch it on again.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop. Alternatively, reset
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other the error message by
objects from the device. applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage, Din1 or by shorting
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow Din1 to GND.
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Impermissible point of Correct the operating
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy operation (e.g. back point. Let the device
Impeller not Imbalance in rotating Clean the device; pressure too high) cool down.
running smoothly parts replace it if imbalance To reset the error
persists after cleaning. message, switch off
Make sure no the line voltage for at
weight clips are least 25 s and then
removed during switch it on again.
cleaning. Alternatively, reset
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate the error message by
from supply and applying a control
remove mechanical signal of < 0.5 V to
blockage. Din1 or by shorting
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage, Din1 to GND.
restore power supply.
Attention! The error In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
Translation of the original operating instructions

message resets
automatically.
Device restarts 6.1 Vibration testing
automatically without
warning. Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
Faulty connection Isolate from supply,
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
correct connection;
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
see connection
diagram.
Broken motor winding Replace device
Thermal overload Allow motor to cool
protector activated off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary

305

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 11 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

Impeller for Visual inspection At least every Clean or

wear/deposits/ 6 months replace impeller
corrosion and
damage
Tightness of Visual inspection At least every Retighten,
cable gland 6 months replace if
damaged
Abnormal acoustic At least every Replace device
bearing noise 6 months
Vibration test Vibration Recommended Clean, re-
measuring every 6 months balance and if
device, start-up necessary
or run-down replace impeller
measurement

6.4 Disposal
Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation top priority corporate goals.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
situation.
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
6.2 Cleaning around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
NOTE and health protection are fixed criteria.
Damage to the device during cleaning The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
Malfunction possible of the product and its components.
→ Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner. 6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
→ Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
NOTE
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
6.3 Safety inspection regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
NOTE occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
High-voltage test corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.
The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
6.4.2 Disassembly
is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
→ Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
the standard. employing standard procedures for motors.

What to check How to check How often What action? WARNING

Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
Contact Visual inspection At least every Repair or
Translation of the original operating instructions

product components are heavy. These components

protection 6 months replacement of
could drop off during disassembly.
cover for device
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
intactness or
damage → Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.
Device for Visual inspection At least every Replacement of
6.4.3 Component disposal
damage to 6 months device
blades and The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
housing Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
cables 6 months ● Steel and iron
Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten ● Aluminum
protective earth 6 months
terminal ● Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
Insulation of Visual inspection At least every Replace cables ● Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
cables for 6 months with marking
damage ● Insulating materials
● Cables and wires
● Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
306

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 12 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Operating instructions

Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
● Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
● Power cables
● Cables for internal wiring
● Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.

→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.

Translation of the original operating instructions

307

Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 13 / 13

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
308
D.11 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction,
SH280

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 309
Additional documents
D.11 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SH280

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

310 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 G3G280-BR04-M7
Operating instructions

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION

Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 danger to persons.
[email protected] These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
www.ebmpapst.com The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
CONTENTS These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1
1.2 Staff qualifications 1 These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
1.3 Basic safety rules 1 potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
1.4 Voltage 1
DANGER
1.5 Safety and protective features 2
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 2
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
1.7 Mechanical movement 2
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
1.8 Emissions 2
1.9 Hot surface 2 WARNING
1.10 Transport 2 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
1.11 Storage 2 death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
2. INTENDED USE 3
CAUTION
3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
3.1 Product drawing 4 minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
3.2 Nominal data 5 actions are not taken.
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 5 NOTE
3.4 Technical description 5 A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
3.5 Mounting data 6 lead to property damage.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions 6
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 6 1.2 Staff qualifications
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
4.1 Mechanical connection 6 maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
4.2 Electrical connection 6 authorized technical staff.
4.3 Connection in terminal box 8 Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
4.4 Factory settings 8 out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
4.5 Connection diagram 9
1.3 Basic safety rules
4.6 Checking connections 10
4.7 Switching on the device 10 The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
4.8 Switching off the device 10 following installation in the final product.
The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be
Translation of the original operating instructions

5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 observed when working on the device.

Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE 10 increases the risk of accidents.
CAUSES AND REMEDIES Note the following when working on the device:
6.1 Cleaning 11
; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
6.2 Safety inspection 11
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
6.3 Disposal 12
1.4 Voltage
; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.2 Safety inspection.
; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.

311

Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 1 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 G3G280-BR04-M7
Operating instructions

WARNING 1.7 Mechanical movement

Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off DANGER
Electric shock Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
the impeller.
before opening the device.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
CAUTION
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
parts have come to a standstill.
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. WARNING
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
CAUTION can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, can result.
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
failure.
while working on rotating parts.
Risk of injury
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.
→ When working on the device, switch off the line voltage 1.8 Emissions
and ensure that it cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop. WARNING
Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
objects from the device. Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
1.5 Safety and protective features → Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
DANGER equipment such as hearing protection.
Protective device missing and protective device not
→ Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
functioning
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for 1.9 Hot surface
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and CAUTION
guard grille. High temperature on electronics housing
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the Risk of burns
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at → Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. 1.10 Transport
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you NOTE
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured Transporting the device
adequately. → Transport the device in its original packaging only.
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
Translation of the original operating instructions

→ Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a

ineffective protective device. lashing strip.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 1.11 Storage
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
with open- and closed-loop control devices. protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate packaging in a clean environment.
shielding measures have to be taken by the user.
; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
NOTE installation.
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
the device in customer equipment.
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. service life.
; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
described prior to commissioning.
; Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.

312

Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 2 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 G3G280-BR04-M7
Operating instructions

2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
● Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/
TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems.
● The device is to be used in networks with network quality
characteristics as per EN 50160.
● Use of the device in stationary systems only.
● Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
● Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
● Operating the device with all protective devices.
● Following the operating instructions.

Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
● Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
● Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
● Opening the terminal box during operation.
● Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
● Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
● Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
● Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
● Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
● Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
Translation of the original operating instructions

functions.
● Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
● In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.

313

Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 3 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 G3G280-BR04-M7
Operating instructions

3. TECHNICAL DATA

3.1 Product drawing

All dimensions in mm.

1 Cable diameter min. 8 mm, max. 12 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
2 Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Cable diameter min. 4 mm, max. 7 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm (included seal must be used)
3 Tightening torque 1.5 ± 0.2 Nm
Translation of the original operating instructions

314

Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 4 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 G3G280-BR04-M7
Operating instructions

3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description

Motor M3G084-DF Weight 15 kg
Size 280 mm
Phase 3~ Motor size 84
Nominal voltage / VAC 400 Rotor surface Painted black
Nominal voltage 380 .. 480 Terminal box material PP plastic
range / VAC Electronics housing Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Frequency / Hz 50/60 material
Method of obtaining ml Impeller material PP plastic
data Number of blades 6
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2700 Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
Power consumption / W 530 Degree of protection IP55
Current draw / A 0.85 Insulation class "F"
Min. ambient -25 Moisture (F) / H1
temperature / °C Environmental (H)
Max. ambient 60 protection class
temperature / °C Installation position Any
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air Condensation None
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment drainage holes
Subject to change Mode S1
Motor bearing Ball bearing; (sealed)
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
2011 - Operation and alarm display
Actual Req. 2015
- External 24 V input (parameter setting)
- Alarm relay
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 66 47.2
- Integrated PID controller
02 Measurement category A
- Motor current limitation
03 Efficiency category Static
- PFC, passive
04 Efficiency grade N 79.8 61 - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
05 Variable speed drive Yes - Soft start
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label.
- EEPROM write cycles: 100,000
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG maximum
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart - Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
· HRA 590344 - Control interface with SELV potential
D-74673 Mulfingen
safely disconnected from the mains
08 Type G3G280-BR04-M7
- Thermal overload protection for
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.48 electronics/motor
09 Air flow qv / m³/h 1505 - Line undervoltage / phase failure
09 Pressure increase total psf / 692 detection
Pa Touch current <= 3.5 mA
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2710 according to IEC
Translation of the original operating instructions

11 Specific ratio* 1.01 60990 (measuring

12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is circuit Fig. 4, TN
provided in the operating instructions.
Information on installation, operation and system)
13 Maintenance
maintenance is provided in the operating Electrical hookup Terminal box
instructions. Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
internally connected
measurement category are detailed in the Protection class I (with customer connection of protective
CE declaration. earth)
* Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa Conformity with EN 61800-5-1; CE
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller standards
combination in a standardized measurement setup. Approval CSA C22.2 No. 77 + CAN/CSA-
E60730-1; EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730-1
With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for
support.
; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection.

315

Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 5 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 G3G280-BR04-M7
Operating instructions

Information on surface quality 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP

The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. 4.1 Mechanical connection
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional
accuracy. CAUTION
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over Cutting and crushing hazard when removing blower
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the from packaging
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against → Carefully remove the blower from its packaging, touching
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in only the housing. Strictly avoid shocks.
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. → Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
3.5 Mounting data CAUTION
Heavy load when unpacking device
Strength class of 8.8 Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
screws
→ Two people should work together to remove the device from
; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self- its packaging.
locking screws).
NOTE
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product Damage to the device from vibration
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. Bearing damage, shorter service life
3.6 Transport and storage conditions → The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
from sections of the installation.
Max. permitted +80 °C → If the fan is connected to air ducts, the connection should
ambient temp. for be isolated from vibration, e.g. using compensators or similar
motor (transport/ elements.
storage)
→ Ensure stress-free attachment of the fan to the
Min. permitted -40 °C
substructure.
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/ ; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
storage) be installed.
; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
CAUTION
If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side Possible damage to the device
so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 16- If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
75 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12 → Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
of the customer system to the public power system is greater
● The fan must not be strained on fastening.
than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/ 4.2 Electrical connection
owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation
with the network operator, that this device is only connected to DANGER
a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal Voltage on the device
Translation of the original operating instructions

to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. Electric shock

→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.
DANGER
Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury

316

Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 6 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 G3G280-BR04-M7
Operating instructions

→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. 4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line
and PE connections.
protection only, no equipment protection).
CAUTION
Nominal Fuse Automatic Cable Cable
Voltage
voltage circuit cross- cross-
The device is a built-in component and has no disconnecting
breaker section section
switch.
VDE UL VDE mm² *AWG
→ Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off 3/PE AC 16 A 15 A C16A 1.5 16
with an all-pole disconnection switch. 380-480
→ When working on the device, secure the system/ VAC
machine in which the device is installed so as to prevent it 3/PE AC 20 A 20 A C20A 2.5 14
from being switched back on. 380-480
NOTE VAC
Device malfunctions possible 3/PE AC 25 A 25 A C25A 4.0 12
Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line. 380-480
VAC
→ Maintain the greatest possible clearance.
Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable * AWG = American Wire Gauge
routing)
4.2.3 Reactive currents
NOTE
Water ingress into wires or cables Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
device. reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
environment. on.
● The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch. ● At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
(operational readiness) is typically < 5 W.

4.2.1 Requirements 4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)

; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
connection data. installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
the device voltage. drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the while operating the device. When the device power supply is
nameplate. switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
cable cross-section is at least
Translation of the original operating instructions

4.2.5 Leakage current

AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value.
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end
4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
symbol and a hole.

317

Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 7 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 G3G280-BR04-M7
Operating instructions

4.3 Connection in terminal box

4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection

Fig. 2: Fan installed lying flat, cable routed in a U-shaped loop.

When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
Fig. 1: Recommended stripped lengths in mm (inside terminal box) the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.
Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
NOTE
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
used.
→ This must be checked by the user.

4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals

WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
; Remove the cap from the cable gland. Fig. 3: Cable routing for fans installed upright.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in. 4.4 Factory settings
; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
box.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
; First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Fan/device address 01
Use a screwdriver to do so. Max. PWM / % 100
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out. Min. PWM / % 5
; Seal the terminal box. Save set value to Yes
Translation of the original operating instructions

EEPROM
4.3.3 Cable routing
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable. Direction of action Positive (heating)
parameter set 1
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration. Direction of action Positive (heating)
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is parameter set 2
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.
→ If this is not possible, a drip edge can be produced by
fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable gland for example.

318

Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 8 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 G3G280-BR04-M7
Operating instructions

4.5 Connection diagram

No. Conn. Designation Function/assignment

1 PE Protective earth
2 PE Protective earth
3 L1 Power supply
4 L2 Power supply
5 L3 Power supply
6 NC Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation
on control interface side
7 COM Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation
on control interface side
8 GND Reference ground for control interface, SELV
9 RSA RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV
10 RSB RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV
11 0-10 V Analog input (set value) SELV, 0-10 V, Ri = 100 kΩ, adjustable curve, jumpered to +10 V corresponds to
100% PWM
12 +10 V / 24 V IN Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, SELV, +10 V ±3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof, power supply for external
devices (e.g. pot);
fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply
Translation of the original operating instructions

319

Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 9 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 G3G280-BR04-M7
Operating instructions

4.6 Checking connections ; When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases).
; Make sure a restart is impossible 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
; Check the cables for proper fit.
The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover Fault Safety feature description/
closes without resistance. function
Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
Blocked rotor ; After the blockage is
the threads.
removed, the motor restarts
; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that automatically.
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened. Line undervoltage (line voltage ; If the line voltage returns to
outside of permitted nominal permitted values, the motor
4.7 Switching on the device voltage range) restarts automatically.
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and Phase failure A phase of the supply voltage
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety fails for at least 5 s.
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for ; When all phases are
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or correctly supplied again, the
similar connectors by the customer. motor automatically restarts after
10-40 s.
WARNING
Hot motor housing
Risk of fire
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
located close to the blower. CAUSES AND REMEDIES
; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
papst for repair or replacement.
; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any
foreign matter found. WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
; Apply the nominal supply voltage.
switched off
; Start the device by changing the input signal. Electric shock
NOTE → Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
Damage to the device from vibration before opening the device.
Bearing damage, shorter service life
CAUTION
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
entire speed control range. the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
→ Severe vibration can arise for instance from inexpert failure.
handling, transportation damage and resultant imbalance or Risk of injury
be caused by component or structural resonance.
Translation of the original operating instructions

→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.

→ Speed ranges with excessively high vibration levels and → When working on the device, switch off the line voltage
possibly resonant frequencies must be determined in the and ensure that it cannot be switched back on.
course of fan commissioning.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ Either run through the resonant range as quickly as
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
possible with speed control or find another remedy.
objects from the device.
→ Operation with excessively high vibration levels can
lead to premature failure. If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
4.8 Switching off the device any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Switching off the device during operation: Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
; Switch off the device via the control input. Impeller not Imbalance in rotating Clean the device;
running smoothly parts replace it if imbalance
; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power persists after cleaning.
supply. Make sure no
Switching off the device for maintenance: weight clips are
; Switch off the device via the control input. removed during
; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power cleaning.
supply.
320
; Disconnect the device from the power supply.

Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 10 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 G3G280-BR04-M7
Operating instructions

Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate Impermissible point of Correct the operating
from supply and operation (e.g. back point. Let the device
remove mechanical pressure too high) cool down.
blockage. To reset the error
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage, message, switch off
restore power supply. the line voltage for at
Attention! The error least 25 s and then
message resets switch it on again.
automatically. Alternatively, reset
Device restarts the error message by
automatically without applying a control
warning. signal of < 0.5 V to
Faulty connection Isolate from supply, Din1 or by shorting
correct connection; Din1 to GND.
see connection
diagram. In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
Broken motor winding Replace device
Thermal overload Allow motor to cool
protector activated off, locate and rectify 6.1 Cleaning
cause of error,
release restart lockout NOTE
if necessary Damage to the device during cleaning
Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let Malfunction possible
the device cool down. → Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
To reset the error → Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
message, switch off
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then 6.2 Safety inspection
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset NOTE
the error message by High-voltage test
applying a control The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
signal of < 0.5 V to is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
Din1 or by shorting → Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
Din1 to GND. legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
too high temperature. Let the the standard.
device cool down.
To reset the error What to check How to check How often What action?
message, switch off Contact Visual inspection At least every Repair or
the line voltage for at protection 6 months replacement of
least 25 s and then cover for device
intactness or
Translation of the original operating instructions

switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset damage
the error message by Device for Visual inspection At least every Replacement of
applying a control damage to 6 months device
signal of < 0.5 V to blades and
Din1 or by shorting housing
Din1 to GND. Fastening the Visual inspection At least every Fasten
cables 6 months
Insulation of Visual inspection At least every Replace cables
cables for 6 months
damage
Tightness of Visual inspection At least every Retighten,
cable gland 6 months replace if
damaged
Abnormal acoustic At least every Replace device
bearing noise 6 months

321

Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 11 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
 G3G280-BR04-M7
Operating instructions

6.3 Disposal Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
top priority corporate goals. → Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
6.3.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.

6.3.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.

6.3.3 Component disposal

The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
● Steel and iron
● Aluminum
● Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
● Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
Translation of the original operating instructions

● Insulating materials
● Cables and wires
● Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
● Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
● Power cables
● Cables for internal wiring
● Electrolytic capacitors

322

Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 12 / 12

ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · [email protected] · www.ebmpapst.com
Index
Circuit diagram, 69
Cleaning, 110
" Spent grease chamber, 116
Condensation, 44, 58
"Siemens Industry Online Support" App, 162
Connecting cables
Selection of, 68, 75
Connection
5 Electrical, 70
5 safety rules, 15 External fan, 75
Holding brake, 83
Speed encoder, 82
A Temperature sensor, 83
Connection data, 70
Air discharge throttle metal plate, 81
Converter, 24
Aligning, 60
Cooling, 31
Prerequisites, 54
Cooling capacity, 25
Alignment accuracy, 63
Cooling method, 25
Aluminum conductors, 73
Cooling water
Anti-condensation heating, 33, 98
Connection, 65
installation, 135
Specification, 29
Insulation resistance, 53
Cooling water intake temperature, 30
Anti-corrosion agent
Cooling water supply, 90, 97
Removing, 55
Corrective maintenance
Anti-freeze, 44
Initial inspection, 107
Anti-freeze protection, 44
Corrosion protection, 45
Application range, 21
Creepage distance, 72

B D
Bearing currents, 46, 84
Degree of protection, 25
Bearing insulation, 47
Disassembly, 120
Bearing seizure damage, 41
Disposal, 158
Bearing shield
External fan, 127
Assembly, 123
Machine, 119
Disassembly, 123
Disposal
Bearing temperature
Chemicals, 159
Monitoring, 93
Components, 158
Set values, 93
Drive, 24
Bolt locking device, 163
DRIVE-CLiQ, 67, 130

C E
Cable lug, 71
Electromagnetic fields, 19
Cable outlet direction, 82
EMC cable glands, 70
Center of gravity, 37, 58
Emergency off, 99
Certificates
Emitted interference, 19
EAC, 23
Environmental requirements, 26
UL and cUL, 24
Equipotential bonding, 74
Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning, 89

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 323
Index

Equipotential bonding conductor, 46, 84 Insulation resistance, 50, 88, 109

ESD guidelines, 18 Anti-condensation heating, 53
External fan, 25, 33, 145 measure, 51
Connection, 75, 77, 78 Interference immunity, 19
Filter mat, 118 Interference voltages, 19
Maintaining, 116 Interlocking circuit
Maintenance, 116 Anti-condensation heating, 33
Refitting, 66, 126 External fan, 33

F L
Faults Lifting, 37, 57
Electrical, 101, 102 Line operation, 24
Holding brake, 103 Live parts, 16
Inspection, 100, 107 Long-term storage, 43
Mechanical, 102 Low-Voltage Directive, 15
Roller bearings, 103
Faults in operation, 96
Fixing, 67 M
Flammable substances, 17
Machine
Flange-mounted motors, 65
Mounting, 61
Foundation surfaces, 54
setting down, 60
Machine design, 23
IEC, 23
G Main inspection, 110
General inspection, 108 Maintenance
Geometry of the flange, 54 Cooling system, 116
Maintenance intervals, 105
Maximum speed, 91
H Flange mounting, 65
Minimum clearances, 72
Hazardous substances, 17
Motor
Hearing damage, 17, 35
Aligning, 63
Holding brake, 26, 167
Mounting
Connection, 83
Flange, 65
Faults, 103
Motor feet, 65
Magnetic field, 87
Mounting-foot hole dimensions, 54
Spare parts, 134
Hot surfaces, 17
Hotline, 162
N
Noise emissions, 17, 35
I
Initial inspection, 109
Inspection
O
Faults, 100, 107 Operating mode, 29
Installation Operating pressure, 66
Initial inspection, 107 Output element, 56
Insulated bearings, 46 Overspeeds, 29

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

324 Operating Instructions 01/2019
 Index

Live parts, 16
Rotating parts, 16
P Screws with preCOTE coating, 120
Sealing, 73
Paint finish, 27
Sealing agent, 124
Paint system, 131
Selection of bolts, 61
Paintwork damage, 131
Sensor module, 131
Permanent lubrication, 109
Shaft assembly, 35
Pipe connection, 32
Siemens Industry Online Support
Polarization index, 50, 53, 88, 109
App, 162
Preparations for assembly, 50
Siemens Service Center, 162
Pressure drop, 33, 66
Spare parts, 133
Property class, 61
External fan option L75, 145
Protecting ring, 122
Holding brake, 134
Protective conductor, 85
Motor, 135, 144
Roller bearing cartridge NDE, 141, 142, 150, 151,
152
Q Rolling-contact bearing bush, drive end, 136, 137,
Qualified personnel, 16 138, 139, 146, 147, 148, 149
Rolling-contact bearing bush, non-drive end, 140,
143, 153
R Speed encoder, 155, 156
Terminal box, 154
Rating plate, 21
Spare parts ordering, 133
Bar code, 133
Spares on Web, 134
REACH regulation, 157
Speed, 35
Re-commissioning, 100
Speed encoder
Regreasing, 109, 114
Connection, 82
Regreasing device, 110
Electrical connection, 130
Regreasing intervals, 108
Mounting, 129
Regreasing system, 115
Separating, 129
Residual risks, 29
Speed monitoring, 98
Restriction of certain Hazardous Substances, 157
Spent grease chamber, 116
Risk of explosion, 21
Stoppages, 99
RoHS, 157
Roller bearings, 99
Roller bearings
storage
faults, 103
Indoor, 42
Versions, 27
Supplementary devices, 25
Rolling bearings
Switching on, 91, 92
Replacement, 134
System resonances, 35
Rotating parts, 16
Rotor, 22
attach, 119
Rotor shipping brace, 39, 43
T
Technical Support, 162
Temperature sensor
S Connection, 83
Terminal box, 69, 70
Safety instructions
Maintaining, 118
Flammable substances, 17
Sealing, 74
Hazardous substances, 17
Terminal designation, 69
Hot surfaces, 17
Test run, 92
Thermal motor protection, 34

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

Operating Instructions 01/2019 325
Index

Threadlocker, 120
Tightening torques, 67
Bolted connection, 163
Torsional loadings, 35
Training, 161
Transporting, 37, 38, 57
Type of balancing, 55, 57
Types of construction, 24

V
Vibration response of the system, 61
Vibration severity, 61
Vibration values, 35, 92

W
Water drain hole, 44, 59
Water drainage hole, 58

SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.

326 Operating Instructions 01/2019
AA Manual STROMAG Break
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G250RR03H4
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G280RR03H4

AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G250RR17H9
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G280RR04H9
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G250RR03M4
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G280RR03M4
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G250RR17M9
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G280RR04M9
AB OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_G3G280BR04M7
Further Information

www.siemens.com/drives

Siemens AG
Process Industries and Drives
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY